C8051T605-GSR [SILICON]

暂无描述;
C8051T605-GSR
型号: C8051T605-GSR
厂家: SILICON    SILICON
描述:

暂无描述

可编程只读存储器 电动程控只读存储器
文件: 总168页 (文件大小:1652K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Mixed Signal OTP EPROM MCU Family  
High Speed 8051 µC Core  
Analog Peripherals  
-
10-Bit Analog to Digital Converter  
-
Pipe-lined instruction architecture; executes 70% of  
instructions in 1 or 2 system clocks  
Up to 500 ksps  
Up to 8 external inputs  
-
-
25 MIPS peak throughput with 25 MHz clock  
Expanded interrupt handler  
V
from external pin, V , or internal regulator  
REF  
DD  
Built-in temperature sensor  
External conversion start input option  
Digital Peripherals  
-
Comparator  
-
8 port I/O; All 5 V tolerant with high sink current  
Programmable hysteresis and response time  
Configurable as interrupt or reset source  
Low current (< 0.5 µA)  
-
Hardware enhanced UART and SMBus™ serial  
ports  
Memory  
-
-
Three general purpose 16-bit counter/timers  
16-Bit programmable counter array (PCA) with three  
capture/compare modules  
-
256 bytes internal data RAM  
-
8, 4 or 2 kB one time programmable code memory  
On-Chip Debug  
-
8 or 16-bit PWM  
C8051F300 can be used as in-system code devel-  
opment platform; complete development kit avail-  
able  
Rising / falling edge capture  
Frequency output  
Software timer  
Clock Sources  
-
On-chip debug circuitry facilitates full speed,  
non-intrusive in-system debug  
-
-
-
Internal oscillator: 24.5 MHz with ±2% accuracy  
supports UART operation  
External oscillator: RC, Single Capacitor, or CMOS  
Clock Modes  
Can switch between clock sources on-the-fly; useful  
in power saving modes  
Supply Voltage 1.8 to 3.6 V  
-
-
-
-
On-chip LDO regulator for core supply  
Typical operating current: 5.0 mA @ 25 MHz  
Typical stop mode current (regulator off): <0.1 µA  
Built-in brown-out detector  
Temperature Range: –40 to +85 °C  
11-Pin QFN or 14-Pin SOIC Package  
-
QFN Size = 3 x 3 mm  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL I/O  
PERIPHERALS  
UART  
SMBus  
PCA  
TEMP  
SENSOR  
A
M
U
X
10-bit  
500 ksps  
ADC  
Timer 0  
Timer 1  
Timer 2  
+
-
C8051T600/2/4  
VOLTAGE  
COMPARATOR  
CALIBRATED PRECISION INTERNAL  
OSCILLATOR  
HIGH-SPEED CONTROLLER CORE  
2/4/8 kB  
OTP EPROM  
12  
8051 CPU  
(25 MIPS)  
DEBUG  
256 B SRAM  
POR WDT  
INTERRUPTS  
CIRCUITRY  
Rev. 0.5 2/07  
Copyright © 2007 by Silicon Laboratories  
C8051T60x  
This information applies to a product under development. Its characteristics and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
2
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table of Contents  
1. System Overview.................................................................................................... 13  
1.1. CIP-51™ Microcontroller Core.......................................................................... 16  
1.1.1. Fully 8051 Compatible.............................................................................. 16  
1.1.2. Improved Throughput............................................................................... 16  
1.1.3. Additional Features .................................................................................. 17  
1.2. On-Chip Memory............................................................................................... 18  
1.3. On-Chip Debug Circuitry and Code Development Options............................... 18  
1.4. Programmable Digital I/O and Crossbar........................................................... 19  
1.5. Serial Ports ....................................................................................................... 19  
1.6. Programmable Counter Array........................................................................... 19  
1.7. 10-Bit Analog to Digital Converter (C8051T600/2/4) ........................................ 21  
1.8. Comparator....................................................................................................... 22  
2. Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................. 23  
3. Global Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................... 24  
4. Pinout and Package Definitions............................................................................ 26  
5. ADC0 - 10-Bit SAR ADC (C8051T600/2/4 Only).................................................... 31  
5.1. Analog Multiplexer ............................................................................................ 32  
5.2. Gain Setting ...................................................................................................... 32  
5.3. Output Coding................................................................................................... 32  
5.4. 8-Bit Compatibility Mode................................................................................... 32  
5.5. Temperature Sensor......................................................................................... 33  
5.5.1. Calibration ................................................................................................ 33  
5.6. Modes of Operation .......................................................................................... 36  
5.6.1. Starting a Conversion............................................................................... 36  
5.6.2. Tracking Modes........................................................................................ 37  
5.6.3. Settling Time Requirements..................................................................... 38  
5.7. Programmable Window Detector...................................................................... 42  
5.7.1. Window Detector Example....................................................................... 42  
6. Voltage Reference Options.................................................................................... 45  
7. Comparator0 ........................................................................................................... 47  
8. Voltage Regulator (REG0)...................................................................................... 53  
9. CIP-51 Microcontroller ........................................................................................... 55  
9.1. Instruction Set................................................................................................... 56  
9.1.1. Instruction and CPU Timing ..................................................................... 56  
9.2. Memory Organization........................................................................................ 61  
9.2.1. Program Memory...................................................................................... 61  
9.2.2. Data Memory............................................................................................ 62  
9.2.3. General Purpose Registers...................................................................... 62  
9.2.4. Bit Addressable Locations........................................................................ 63  
9.2.5. Stack ....................................................................................................... 63  
9.2.6. Special Function Registers....................................................................... 63  
9.2.7. Register Descriptions ............................................................................... 67  
Rev. 0.5  
3
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.3. Interrupt Handler............................................................................................... 70  
9.3.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors ........................................................ 71  
9.3.2. External Interrupts.................................................................................... 71  
9.3.3. Interrupt Priorities..................................................................................... 71  
9.3.4. Interrupt Latency ...................................................................................... 72  
9.3.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions................................................................. 73  
9.4. Power Management Modes.............................................................................. 78  
9.4.1. Idle Mode.................................................................................................. 78  
9.4.2. Stop Mode................................................................................................ 79  
10.Reset Sources......................................................................................................... 81  
10.1.Power-On Reset............................................................................................... 82  
10.2.Power-Fail Reset/V Monitor ......................................................................... 83  
DD  
10.3.External Reset.................................................................................................. 83  
10.4.Missing Clock Detector Reset .......................................................................... 83  
10.5.Comparator0 Reset .......................................................................................... 83  
10.6.PCA Watchdog Timer Reset ............................................................................ 83  
10.7.OTP Error Reset............................................................................................... 84  
10.8.Software Reset................................................................................................. 84  
11.One-Time Programmable Read-Only Memory..................................................... 87  
11.1.Programming the EPROM Memory.................................................................. 87  
11.2.Security Options ............................................................................................... 88  
11.3.Program Memory CRC..................................................................................... 89  
11.3.1.Performing 32-bit CRCs on Full EPROM Content ................................... 89  
11.3.2.Performing 16-bit CRCs on 256-Byte EPROM Blocks............................. 89  
12.Oscillators............................................................................................................... 91  
12.1.Calibrated Internal Oscillator ............................................................................ 91  
12.2.External Oscillator Circuit ................................................................................. 93  
12.3.System Clock Selection.................................................................................... 93  
12.4.External Capacitor Example............................................................................. 95  
12.5.External RC Example ....................................................................................... 95  
13.Port Input/Output.................................................................................................... 97  
13.1.Priority Crossbar Decoder ................................................................................ 98  
13.2.Port I/O Initialization ......................................................................................... 99  
13.3.General Purpose Port I/O............................................................................... 102  
14.SMBus ................................................................................................................... 105  
14.1.Supporting Documents................................................................................... 106  
14.2.SMBus Configuration...................................................................................... 106  
14.3.SMBus Operation ........................................................................................... 106  
14.3.1.Arbitration............................................................................................... 107  
14.3.2.Clock Low Extension.............................................................................. 108  
14.3.3.SCL Low Timeout................................................................................... 108  
14.3.4.SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout .......................................................... 108  
14.4.Using the SMBus............................................................................................ 108  
14.4.1.SMBus Configuration Register............................................................... 110  
14.4.2.SMB0CN Control Register..................................................................... 113  
4
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.4.3.Data Register ......................................................................................... 116  
14.5.SMBus Transfer Modes.................................................................................. 117  
14.5.1.Master Transmitter Mode....................................................................... 117  
14.5.2.Master Receiver Mode........................................................................... 118  
14.5.3.Slave Receiver Mode............................................................................. 119  
14.5.4.Slave Transmitter Mode......................................................................... 120  
14.6.SMBus Status Decoding................................................................................. 120  
15.UART0.................................................................................................................... 123  
15.1.Enhanced Baud Rate Generation................................................................... 124  
15.2.Operational Modes ......................................................................................... 125  
15.2.1.8-Bit UART............................................................................................. 125  
15.2.2.9-Bit UART............................................................................................. 126  
15.3.Multiprocessor Communications .................................................................... 126  
16.Timers.................................................................................................................... 131  
16.1.Timer 0 and Timer 1 ....................................................................................... 131  
16.1.1.Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer................................................................ 131  
16.1.2.Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer................................................................ 133  
16.1.3.Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload...................................... 133  
16.1.4.Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)................................. 134  
16.2.Timer 2 .......................................................................................................... 139  
16.2.1.16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload................................................................ 139  
16.2.2.8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload................................................................ 140  
17.Programmable Counter Array ............................................................................. 143  
17.1.PCA Counter/Timer ........................................................................................ 144  
17.2.Capture/Compare Modules ............................................................................ 145  
17.2.1.Edge-triggered Capture Mode................................................................ 146  
17.2.2.Software Timer (Compare) Mode........................................................... 147  
17.2.3.High Speed Output Mode....................................................................... 148  
17.2.4.Frequency Output Mode ........................................................................ 149  
17.2.5.8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode......................................................... 150  
17.2.6.16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode....................................................... 151  
17.3.Watchdog Timer Mode ................................................................................... 151  
17.3.1.Watchdog Timer Operation.................................................................... 152  
17.3.2.Watchdog Timer Usage ......................................................................... 153  
17.4.Register Descriptions for PCA........................................................................ 154  
18.Revision Specific Behavior ................................................................................. 159  
18.1.Revision Identification..................................................................................... 159  
18.2.SAR Clock Maximum...................................................................................... 160  
18.3.V Monitor Oscillation .................................................................................. 160  
DD  
19.C2 Interface........................................................................................................... 161  
19.1.C2 Interface Registers.................................................................................... 161  
19.2.C2 Pin Sharing ............................................................................................... 166  
Contact Information.................................................................................................. 168  
Rev. 0.5  
5
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
NOTES:  
6
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
List of Figures  
1. System Overview  
Figure 1.1. C8051T600/2/4 Block Diagram.............................................................. 15  
Figure 1.2. C8051T601/3/5 Block Diagram.............................................................. 15  
Figure 1.3. On-Chip Clock and Reset ...................................................................... 17  
Figure 1.4. On-chip Memory Map (C8051T600/1 shown)........................................ 18  
Figure 1.5. Digital Crossbar Diagram....................................................................... 19  
Figure 1.6. PCA Block Diagram ............................................................................... 20  
Figure 1.7. PCA Block Diagram ............................................................................... 20  
Figure 1.8. 10-Bit ADC Block Diagram..................................................................... 21  
Figure 1.9. Comparator Block Diagram.................................................................... 22  
2. Absolute Maximum Ratings  
3. Global Electrical Characteristics  
4. Pinout and Package Definitions  
Figure 4.1. QFN-11 Pinout Diagram (Top View) ...................................................... 27  
Figure 4.2. QFN-11 Package Drawing ..................................................................... 28  
Figure 4.3. SOIC-14 Pinout Diagram (Top View)..................................................... 29  
Figure 4.4. SOIC-14 Package Drawing.................................................................... 30  
5. ADC0 - 10-Bit SAR ADC (C8051T600/2/4 Only)  
Figure 5.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram............................................................ 31  
Figure 5.2. Temperature Sensor Transfer Function................................................. 33  
Figure 5.3. Temperature Sensor Error with 1-Point Calibration (V  
= 2.4 V) ....... 34  
REF  
Figure 5.4. ADC Tracking and Conversion Timing................................................... 37  
Figure 5.5. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits.............................................................. 38  
Figure 5.6. ADC Window Compare Examples ......................................................... 42  
6. Voltage Reference Options  
Figure 6.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram ....................................... 45  
7. Comparator0  
Figure 7.1. Comparator0 Functional Block Diagram ................................................ 47  
Figure 7.2. Comparator Hysteresis Plot ................................................................... 48  
8. Voltage Regulator (REG0)  
9. CIP-51 Microcontroller  
Figure 9.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram............................................................................ 55  
Figure 9.2. Program Memory Maps.......................................................................... 61  
Figure 9.3. Data Memory Map.................................................................................. 62  
10.Reset Sources  
Figure 10.1. Reset Sources...................................................................................... 81  
Figure 10.2. Power-On and V Monitor Reset Timing ........................................... 82  
DD  
11.One-Time Programmable Read-Only Memory  
Figure 11.1. OTP EPROM Program Memory Map................................................... 88  
12.Oscillators  
Figure 12.1. Oscillator Diagram................................................................................ 91  
13.Port Input/Output  
Figure 13.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram....................................................... 97  
Rev. 0.5  
7
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Figure 13.2. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram ................................................................. 97  
Figure 13.3. Crossbar Priority Decoder with XBR0 = 0x00 ...................................... 98  
Figure 13.4. Crossbar Priority Decoder with XBR0 = 0x44 ...................................... 99  
14.SMBus  
Figure 14.1. SMBus Block Diagram ....................................................................... 105  
Figure 14.2. Typical SMBus Configuration............................................................. 106  
Figure 14.3. SMBus Transaction............................................................................ 107  
Figure 14.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation......................................................... 111  
Figure 14.5. Typical Master Transmitter Sequence................................................ 117  
Figure 14.6. Typical Master Receiver Sequence.................................................... 118  
Figure 14.7. Typical Slave Receiver Sequence...................................................... 119  
Figure 14.8. Typical Slave Transmitter Sequence.................................................. 120  
15.UART0  
Figure 15.1. UART0 Block Diagram ....................................................................... 123  
Figure 15.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic.................................................................... 124  
Figure 15.3. UART Interconnect Diagram .............................................................. 125  
Figure 15.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram............................................................... 125  
Figure 15.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram............................................................... 126  
Figure 15.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram .......................... 127  
16.Timers  
Figure 16.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram.................................................................. 132  
Figure 16.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram.................................................................. 133  
Figure 16.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram.................................................................. 134  
Figure 16.4. Timer 2 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram .................................................. 139  
Figure 16.5. Timer 2 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram .................................................... 140  
17.Programmable Counter Array  
Figure 17.1. PCA Block Diagram............................................................................ 143  
Figure 17.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram.................................................... 144  
Figure 17.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram ............................................................. 145  
Figure 17.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram.............................................................. 146  
Figure 17.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram.................................................. 147  
Figure 17.6. PCA High Speed Output Mode Diagram............................................ 148  
Figure 17.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode ............................................................ 149  
Figure 17.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram ......................................................... 150  
Figure 17.9. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode...................................................................... 151  
Figure 17.10. PCA Module 2 with Watchdog Timer Enabled ................................. 152  
18.Revision Specific Behavior  
Figure 18.1. Device Package - SOIC 14 ................................................................ 159  
Figure 18.2. Device Package - QFN 10.................................................................. 159  
19.C2 Interface  
Figure 19.1. Typical C2 Pin Sharing....................................................................... 166  
8
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
List of Tables  
1. System Overview  
Table 1.1. Product Selection Guide ......................................................................... 14  
2. Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Table 2.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................... 23  
3. Global Electrical Characteristics  
Table 3.1. Global DC Electrical Characteristics ....................................................... 24  
Table 3.2. Index to Electrical Characteristics Tables ............................................... 25  
4. Pinout and Package Definitions  
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 ........................................... 26  
Table 4.2. QFN-11 Package Dimensions ................................................................ 28  
Table 4.3. SOIC-14 Package Dimensions ............................................................... 30  
5. ADC0 - 10-Bit SAR ADC (C8051T600/2/4 Only)  
Table 5.1. ADC0 Electrical Characteristics .............................................................. 44  
6. Voltage Reference Options  
Table 6.1. External Voltage Reference Circuit Electrical Characteristics ................ 46  
7. Comparator0  
Table 7.1. Comparator0 Electrical Characteristics .................................................. 52  
8. Voltage Regulator (REG0)  
Table 8.1. Internal Voltage Regulator Electrical Characteristics ............................. 54  
9. CIP-51 Microcontroller  
Table 9.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary ............................................................ 57  
Table 9.2. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map ...................................... 64  
Table 9.3. Special Function Registers ..................................................................... 65  
Table 9.4. Interrupt Summary .................................................................................. 72  
10.Reset Sources  
Table 10.1. User Code Space Address Limits ......................................................... 84  
Table 10.2. Reset Electrical Characteristics ............................................................ 86  
11.One-Time Programmable Read-Only Memory  
Table 11.1. EPROM Electrical Characteristics ........................................................ 87  
Table 11.2. Security Byte Decoding ........................................................................ 88  
12.Oscillators  
Table 12.1. Internal Oscillator Electrical Characteristics ......................................... 92  
13.Port Input/Output  
Table 13.1. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics ................................................. 104  
14.SMBus  
Table 14.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection .......................................................... 110  
Table 14.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times ................................................ 111  
Table 14.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN ..................................... 115  
Table 14.4. SMBus Status Decoding ..................................................................... 121  
15.UART0  
Table 15.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using  
the Internal 24.5 MHz Oscillator ......................................................... 130  
Rev. 0.5  
9
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
16.Timers  
17.Programmable Counter Array  
Table 17.1. PCA Timebase Input Options ............................................................. 144  
Table 17.2. PCA0CPM Register Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules .... 145  
Table 17.3. Watchdog Timer Timeout Intervals ..................................................... 153  
18.Revision Specific Behavior  
19.C2 Interface  
10  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
List of Registers  
SFR Definition 5.1. TOFFH: Temperature Offset Measurement High Byte . . . . . . . . . 34  
SFR Definition 5.2. TOFFL: Temperature Offset Measurement Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . 35  
SFR Definition 5.3. AMX0SL: AMUX0 Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
SFR Definition 5.4. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
SFR Definition 5.5. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
SFR Definition 5.6. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
SFR Definition 5.7. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
SFR Definition 5.8. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
SFR Definition 5.9. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
SFR Definition 5.10. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
SFR Definition 5.11. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
SFR Definition 6.1. REF0CN: Reference Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
SFR Definition 7.1. CPT0CN: Comparator0 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
SFR Definition 7.2. CPT0MX: Comparator0 MUX Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
SFR Definition 7.3. CPT0MD: Comparator0 Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
SFR Definition 8.1. REG0CN: Voltage Regulator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
SFR Definition 9.1. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
SFR Definition 9.2. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
SFR Definition 9.3. SP: Stack Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
SFR Definition 9.4. PSW: Program Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
SFR Definition 9.5. ACC: Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
SFR Definition 9.6. B: B Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
SFR Definition 9.7. IE: Interrupt Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
SFR Definition 9.8. IP: Interrupt Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
SFR Definition 9.9. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
SFR Definition 9.10. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
SFR Definition 9.11. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
SFR Definition 9.12. PCON: Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
SFR Definition 10.1. RSTSRC: Reset Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
SFR Definition 12.1. OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
SFR Definition 12.2. OSCICN: Internal Oscillator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
SFR Definition 12.3. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
SFR Definition 13.1. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
SFR Definition 13.2. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
SFR Definition 13.3. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
SFR Definition 13.4. P0: Port0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
SFR Definition 13.5. P0MDIN: Port0 Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
SFR Definition 13.6. P0MDOUT: Port0 Output Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
SFR Definition 14.1. SMB0CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
SFR Definition 14.2. SMB0CN: SMBus Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
SFR Definition 14.3. SMB0DAT: SMBus Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
SFR Definition 15.1. SCON0: Serial Port 0 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
SFR Definition 15.2. SBUF0: Serial (UART0) Port Data Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Rev. 0.5  
11  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 16.1. TCON: Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
SFR Definition 16.2. TMOD: Timer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
SFR Definition 16.3. CKCON: Clock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
SFR Definition 16.4. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
SFR Definition 16.5. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
SFR Definition 16.6. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
SFR Definition 16.7. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
SFR Definition 16.8. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
SFR Definition 16.9. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
SFR Definition 16.10. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
SFR Definition 16.11. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
SFR Definition 16.12. TMR2H Timer 2 High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
SFR Definition 17.1. PCA0CN: PCA Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
SFR Definition 17.2. PCA0MD: PCA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
SFR Definition 17.3. PCA0CPMn: PCA Capture/Compare Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
SFR Definition 17.4. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
SFR Definition 17.5. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
SFR Definition 17.6. PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
SFR Definition 17.7. PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
C2 Register Definition 19.1. C2ADD: C2 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
C2 Register Definition 19.2. DEVICEID: C2 Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
C2 Register Definition 19.3. REVID: C2 Revision ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
C2 Register Definition 19.4. DEVCTL: C2 Device State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
C2 Register Definition 19.5. EPCTL: C2 EPROM Programming Control . . . . . . . . . . 162  
C2 Register Definition 19.6. EPDAT: C2 EPROM Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
C2 Register Definition 19.7. EPADDRH: C2 EPROM Address High Byte . . . . . . . . . 163  
C2 Register Definition 19.8. EPADDRL: C2 EPROM Address Low Byte . . . . . . . . . . 163  
C2 Register Definition 19.9. CRC0: CRC Byte 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
C2 Register Definition 19.10. CRC1: CRC Byte 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
C2 Register Definition 19.11. CRC2: CRC Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
C2 Register Definition 19.12. CRC3: CRC Byte 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
12  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
1. System Overview  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices are fully integrated mixed-signal System-on-a-Chip MCUs. Highlighted fea-  
tures are listed below. Refer to Table 1.1 on page 14 for specific product feature selection.  
High-speed pipelined 8051-compatible microcontroller core (up to 25 MIPS)  
In-system, full-speed, non-intrusive debug interface  
C8051F300 ISP Flash device is available for quick in-system code development  
10-bit 500 ksps ADC with programmable analog multiplexer and integrated temperature sensor  
Precision calibrated 24.5 MHz internal oscillator  
2/4/8 kB of on-chip One-Time Programmable (OTP) EPROM  
256 bytes of on-chip RAM  
2
SMBus/I C and Enhanced UART serial interfaces implemented in hardware  
Three general-purpose 16-bit timers  
Programmable Counter/Timer Array (PCA) with three capture/compare modules and Watchdog Timer  
function  
On-chip Power-On Reset and Supply Monitor  
On-chip Voltage Comparator  
Byte-wide I/O Port (5 V tolerant)  
With on-chip Power-On Reset, Supply Monitor, Watchdog Timer, and clock oscillator, the C8051T600/1/2/  
3/4/5 devices are truly stand-alone System-on-a-Chip solutions. User software has complete control of all  
peripherals, and may individually shut down any or all peripherals for power savings.  
Code written for the C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 family of processors will run on the C8051F300 Mixed-signal  
ISP Flash microcontroller, providing a quick, cost-effective way to develop code without requiring special  
emulator circuitry. The C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 processors include Silicon Laboratories’ 2-Wire C2 Debug  
and Programming interface, which allows non-intrusive (uses no on-chip resources), full speed, in-circuit  
debugging using the production MCU installed in the final application. This debug logic supports inspection  
of memory, viewing and modification of special function registers, setting breakpoints, single stepping, run  
and halt commands. All analog and digital peripherals are fully functional while debugging using C2. The  
two C2 interface pins can be shared with user functions, allowing in-system debugging without occupying  
package pins.  
Each device is specified for 1.8-to-3.6 V operation over the industrial temperature range (–45 to +85 °C).  
An internal LDO is used to supply the processor core voltage at 1.8 V. The Port I/O and RST pins are toler-  
ant of input signals up to 5 V. The C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 are available in 3 x 3 mm 11-pin QFN or 14-pin  
SOIC packaging.  
Rev. 0.5  
13  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 1.1. Product Selection Guide  
C8051T600-GM  
C8051T600-GS  
C8051T601-GM  
C8051T601-GS  
C8051T602-GM  
C8051T602-GS  
C8051T603-GM  
C8051T603-GS  
C8051T604-GM  
C8051T604-GS  
C8051T605-GM  
C8051T605-GS  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
8k*  
8k*  
8k*  
8k*  
4k  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
QFN-11  
SOIC-14  
QFN-11  
SOIC-14  
QFN-11  
SOIC-14  
QFN-11  
SOIC-14  
QFN-11  
SOIC-14  
QFN-11  
SOIC-14  
4k  
4k  
4k  
2k  
2k  
2k  
2k  
-
-
*512 Bytes Reserved for Factory Use  
14  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Port I/O Configuration  
CIP-51 8051  
Controller Core  
Digital Peripherals  
P0.0/VREF  
P0.1  
UART  
2k/4k/8k Byte OTP  
Program Memory  
Power On  
Reset  
Timers 0,  
1, and 2  
P0.2/VPP  
P0.3/EXTCLK  
P0.4/TX  
P0.5/RX  
P0.6  
Priority  
Crossbar  
Decoder  
Reset  
Port 0  
Drivers  
PCA/  
WDT  
Debug /  
Programming  
Hardware  
C2CK/RST  
256 byte SRAM  
SYSCLK  
SFR  
Bus  
SMBus  
P0.7/C2D  
C2D  
Crossbar Control  
Power Net  
Analog Peripherals  
VDD  
GND  
CP0  
+
-
VDD  
VREF  
External  
Clock  
Circuit  
Precision  
Internal  
Oscillator  
Comparator  
VDD  
EXTCLK  
A
AIN0 - AIN7  
10-bit  
500ksps  
ADC  
M
U
X
System Clock  
Configuration  
Temp  
Sensor  
Figure 1.1. C8051T600/2/4 Block Diagram  
Port I/O Configuration  
CIP-51 8051  
Controller Core  
Digital Peripherals  
P0.0  
UART  
2k/4k/8k Byte OTP  
Program Memory  
Power On  
Reset  
P0.1  
Timers 0,  
P0.2/VPP  
P0.3/EXTCLK  
P0.4/TX  
P0.5/RX  
P0.6  
1, and 2  
Priority  
Crossbar  
Decoder  
Reset  
Port 0  
Drivers  
PCA/  
WDT  
Debug /  
Programming  
Hardware  
C2CK/RST  
256 byte SRAM  
SYSCLK  
SFR  
Bus  
SMBus  
P0.7/C2D  
C2D  
Crossbar Control  
Power Net  
VDD  
GND  
Analog Peripherals  
External  
Clock  
Circuit  
Precision  
Internal  
Oscillator  
CP0  
+
EXTCLK  
-
Comparator  
System Clock  
Configuration  
Figure 1.2. C8051T601/3/5 Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
15  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
1.1. CIP-51™ Microcontroller Core  
1.1.1. Fully 8051 Compatible  
The C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 family utilizes Silicon Labs' proprietary CIP-51 microcontroller core. The CIP-51  
is fully compatible with the MCS-51™ instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can  
be used to develop software. The CIP-51 core offers all the peripherals included with a standard 8052,  
including two standard 16-bit counter/timers, one enhanced 16-bit counter/timer with external clock input, a  
full-duplex UART with extended baud rate configuration, 256 bytes of internal RAM, 128 byte Special  
Function Register (SFR) address space, and a byte-wide I/O Port.  
1.1.2. Improved Throughput  
The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the stan-  
dard 8051 architecture. In a standard 8051, all instructions except for MUL and DIV take 12 or 24 system  
clock cycles to execute with a maximum system clock of 12-to-24 MHz. By contrast, the CIP-51 core exe-  
cutes 70% of its instructions in one or two system clock cycles, with only four instructions taking more than  
four system clock cycles. With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of  
25 MIPS.  
The CIP-51 has a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instructions that  
require each execution time.  
Clocks to Execute  
Number of Instructions  
1
26  
2
50  
2/3  
5
3
14  
3/4  
7
4
3
4/5  
1
5
2
8
1
16  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
1.1.3. Additional Features  
The C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 SoC family includes several key enhancements to the CIP-51 core and peripher-  
als to improve performance and ease of use in end applications.  
The extended interrupt handler provides 12 interrupt sources into the CIP-51, allowing numerous analog  
and digital peripherals to interrupt the controller. An interrupt driven system requires less intervention by  
the MCU, giving it more effective throughput. The extra interrupt sources are very useful when building  
multi-tasking, real-time systems.  
Several reset sources are available: power-on reset circuitry (POR), a Supply Monitor, a Watchdog Timer,  
a Missing Clock Detector, a voltage level detection from Comparator0, a forced software reset, an external  
reset pin, and an illegal OTP read/write detection. Each reset source except for the POR, Reset Input Pin,  
and OTP protection may be disabled by the user in software. The WDT may be permanently enabled in  
software after a power-on reset during MCU initialization.  
The internal oscillator is factory calibrated to 24.5 MHz, and is accurate to ±2% over the entire operating  
supply and temperature range. The internal oscillator can be directly divided by factors of 2, 4, or 8 to pro-  
vide slower internal clock options. An external oscillator input is also included, allowing an external CMOS  
clock, external capacitor, or external RC circuit to generate the system clock. If desired, the system clock  
source may be switched on-the-fly to the external oscillator circuit. An external oscillator can be extremely  
useful in low power applications, allowing the MCU to run from a slower (power saving) external clock  
source, while periodically switching to the internal oscillator when faster operation is required.  
Supply  
Monitor  
'0'  
/RST  
Power On  
Reset  
Comparator 0  
(wired-OR)  
P0.x  
P0.y  
+
-
C0RSEF  
Missing  
Clock  
Detector  
(one-  
shot)  
Reset  
Funnel  
PCA  
WDT  
(Software Reset)  
SWRSF  
EN  
Illegal OTP  
operation  
EN  
Internal  
Oscillator  
System  
Clock  
External  
Clock  
CIP-51  
Microcontroller  
Core  
EXTCLK  
System Reset  
Clock Select  
Source  
Extended Interrupt  
Handler  
Figure 1.3. On-Chip Clock and Reset  
Rev. 0.5  
17  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
1.2. On-Chip Memory  
The CIP-51 has a standard 8051 program and data address configuration. It includes 256 bytes of data  
RAM, with the upper 128 bytes dual-mapped. Indirect addressing accesses the upper 128 bytes of general  
purpose RAM, and direct addressing accesses the 128 byte SFR address space. The lower 128 bytes of  
RAM are accessible via direct and indirect addressing. The first 32 bytes are addressable as four banks of  
general purpose registers, and the next 16 bytes can be byte addressable or bit addressable.  
The C8051T600/1 include 8 kB of EPROM program memory, the C8051T602/3 include 4 kB, and the  
C8051T604/5 include 2 kB. See Figure 1.4 for the C8051T600/1 system memory map.  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
DATA MEMORY  
INTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE  
0xFF  
Upper 128 RAM  
(Indirect Addressing  
Only)  
Special Function  
Register's  
(Direct Addressing Only)  
RESERVED  
0x1E00  
0x1DFF  
0x80  
0x7F  
(Direct and Indirect  
Addressing)  
Lower 128 RAM  
(Direct and Indirect  
Addressing)  
8k bytes  
OTP Memory  
0x30  
0x2F  
Bit Addressable  
0x20  
0x1F  
General Purpose  
Registers  
0x00  
0x0000  
Figure 1.4. On-chip Memory Map (C8051T600/1 shown)  
1.3. On-Chip Debug Circuitry and Code Development Options  
The C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) debug circuitry that provides  
non-intrusive, full speed, in-circuit debugging of the production part installed in the end application.  
Silicon Labs' debugging system supports inspection and modification of memory and registers, break-  
points, and single stepping. No additional target RAM, program memory, timers, or communications chan-  
nels are required. All the digital and analog peripherals are functional and work correctly while debugging.  
All the peripherals (except for the ADC and SMBus) are stalled when the MCU is halted, during single  
stepping, or at a breakpoint in order to keep them synchronized.  
The C8051F300 MCU can be used to quickly develop code for a system using a device in the C8051T600/  
1/2/3/4/5 family. The C8051F300 is an In-System Programmable, Flash-based device that uses the same  
pinout as the C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices, and can run code written for the C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5. The  
C8051T600DK development kit provides all the hardware and software necessary to develop application  
code and perform in-circuit debugging for the C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 MCUs. The kit includes software with a  
developer's studio and debugger, an assembler/linker and evaluation ‘C’ compiler, and the necessary  
cables for connection to the target board or the end-system. The development kit includes an SOIC Socket  
Daughter Card for programming SOIC devices, samples of the C8051T600-GS, and a C8051F300 Emula-  
tion Daughter Card for rapid code development. An AC to DC wall adapter is supplied for powering the  
board.  
18  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
1.4. Programmable Digital I/O and Crossbar  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include a byte-wide I/O Port that behaves like a typical 8051 Port with a few  
enhancements. Each Port pin may be configured as an analog input or a digital I/O pin. Pins selected as  
digital I/Os may additionally be configured for push-pull or open-drain output. The “weak pullups” that are  
fixed on typical 8051 devices may be globally disabled, providing additional power savings.  
Perhaps the most unique Port I/O enhancement is the Digital Crossbar. This is a digital switching network  
that allows mapping of internal digital system resources to Port I/O pins (See Figure 1.5). On-chip counter/  
timers, serial buses, HW interrupts, comparator output, and other digital signals in the controller can be  
configured to appear on the Port I/O pins using the Crossbar Control registers. This allows the user to  
select the exact mix of general purpose Port I/O and digital resources needed for the application.  
XBR0, XBR1,  
P0MDOUT,  
XBR2 Registers  
P0MDIN Registers  
Priority  
Decoder  
2
2
2
Highest  
Priority  
UART  
Digital  
Crossbar  
SMBus  
CP0  
Outputs  
P0.0  
P0.7  
P0  
I/O  
Cells  
8
SYSCLK  
4
2
PCA  
T0, T1  
8
Lowest  
Priority  
Port Latch  
P0  
(P0.0-P0.7)  
Figure 1.5. Digital Crossbar Diagram  
1.5. Serial Ports  
2
The C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 Family includes an SMBus/I C interface and a full-duplex UART with enhanced  
baud rate configuration. Each of the serial buses is fully implemented in hardware and makes extensive  
use of the CIP-51's interrupts, thus requiring very little CPU intervention. Both serial buses can be used at  
the same time.  
1.6. Programmable Counter Array  
An on-chip Programmable Counter/Timer Array (PCA) is included in addition to the three 16-bit general  
purpose counter/timers. The PCA consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer time base with three pro-  
grammable capture/compare modules. The PCA clock is derived from one of six sources: the system clock  
divided by 12, the system clock divided by 4, Timer 0 overflows, an External Clock Input (ECI), the system  
clock, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. The external clock source selection is useful for  
Rev. 0.5  
19  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
real-time clock functionality, where the PCA is clocked by an external source while the internal oscillator  
drives the system clock.  
Each capture/compare module can be configured to operate in one of six modes: Edge-Triggered Capture,  
Software Timer, High Speed Output, 8- or 16-bit Pulse Width Modulator, or Frequency Output. Additionally,  
Capture/Compare Module 2 offers watchdog timer (WDT) capabilities. Following a system reset, Module 2  
is configured and enabled in WDT mode. The PCA Capture/Compare Module I/O and External Clock Input  
may be routed to Port I/O via the Digital Crossbar.  
SYSCLK/12  
SYSCLK/4  
Timer 0 Overflow  
PCA  
16-Bit Counter/Timer  
CLOCK  
MUX  
ECI  
SYSCLK  
External Clock/8  
Capture/Compare  
Module 0  
Capture/Compare  
Module 1  
Capture/Compare  
Module 2  
Digital Crossbar  
Port I/O  
Figure 1.7. PCA Block Diagram  
20  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
1.7. 10-Bit Analog to Digital Converter (C8051T600/2/4)  
The C8051T600/2/4 include an on-chip 10-bit SAR ADC with a 10-channel input multiplexer. With a maxi-  
mum throughput of 500 ksps, the ADC offers true 10-bit accuracy with an INL of ±1LSB. The ADC system  
includes a configurable analog multiplexer that selects the ADC input, and gain settings of 1x or 0.5x. Each  
Port pin is available as an ADC input; additionally, the on-chip Temperature Sensor output and the power  
supply voltage (V ) are available as ADC inputs. User firmware may shut down the ADC when it is not in  
DD  
use to save power.  
Conversions can be started in five ways: a software command, an overflow of Timer 0, 1, or 2, or an exter-  
nal convert start signal. This flexibility allows the start of conversion to be triggered by software events, a  
periodic signal (timer overflows), or external HW signals. Conversion completions are indicated by a status  
bit and an interrupt (if enabled). The resulting 10-bit data word is latched into two SFRs upon completion of  
a conversion.  
An 8-bit compatibility mode is included in the device to facilitate development and backwards-compatibility  
with the C8051F300.  
Window compare registers for the ADC data can be configured to interrupt the controller when ADC data is  
either within or outside of a specified range. The ADC can monitor a key voltage continuously in back-  
ground mode, but not interrupt the controller unless the converted data is within or outside of the specified  
range.  
Configuration and Control Registers  
Software Write  
T0 Overflow  
Start  
Conversion  
P0.0  
P0.1  
P0.2  
P0.3  
P0.4  
P0.5  
P0.6  
P0.7  
TMR2 Overflow  
T1 Overflow  
External  
Convert Start  
10 bit  
SAR  
ADC  
X1 or  
X0.5  
10-to-1  
AMUX  
ADC Data  
Registers  
10  
Temp  
Sensor  
Window  
Compare  
Interrupt  
Window Compare  
Logic  
VDD  
End of  
Conversion  
Interrupt  
Figure 1.8. 10-Bit ADC Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
21  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
1.8. Comparator  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include an on-chip voltage comparator that is enabled/disabled and config-  
ured via user software. All Port I/O pins may be configured as comparator inputs. Two comparator outputs  
may be routed to a Port pin if desired: a latched output and/or an unlatched (asynchronous) output. Com-  
parator response time is programmable, allowing the user to select between high-speed and low-power  
modes. Positive and negative hysteresis is also configurable.  
Comparator interrupts may be generated on rising, falling, or both edges. When in IDLE mode, these inter-  
rupts may be used as a “wake-up” source. The comparator may also be configured as a reset source.  
P0.0  
P0.2  
P0.4  
P0.6  
CP0 +  
Interrupt  
Handler  
VDD  
GND  
+
-
SET  
CLR  
SET  
CLR  
D
Q
Q
D
Q
Q
Crossbar  
P0.1  
P0.3  
P0.5  
P0.7  
(SYNCHRONIZER)  
CP0 -  
Reset  
Decision  
Tree  
Figure 1.9. Comparator Block Diagram  
22  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
2. Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Table 2.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings*  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
–55  
–65  
Typ  
Max  
125  
150  
5.8  
Units  
°C  
Ambient temperature under bias  
Storage Temperature  
°C  
Voltage on RST or any Port I/O Pin  
(except V during programming) with  
V
V
> 2.2 V  
< 2.2 V  
–0.3  
–0.3  
V
V
DD  
DD  
V
+ 3.6  
PP  
DD  
respect to GND  
Voltage on V with respect to GND  
V
V
> 2.4 V  
–0.3  
7.0  
10  
V
s
PP  
DD  
PP  
during a programming operation  
Duration of High-voltage on V pin  
> (V + 3.6 V)  
DD  
PP  
(cumulative)  
Voltage on V with respect to GND  
Regulator in Normal Mode  
Regulator in Bypass Mode  
–0.3  
–0.3  
4.2  
1.98  
V
V
DD  
Maximum Total current through V  
and GND  
500  
100  
mA  
DD  
Maximum output current sunk by RST  
or any Port pin  
mA  
*Note: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the  
device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the devices at those or any other conditions  
above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
Rev. 0.5  
23  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
3. Global Electrical Characteristics  
Table 3.1. Global DC Electrical Characteristics  
–40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz System Clock unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
1
Regulator in Normal Mode  
Regulator in Bypass Mode  
1.8  
1.7  
3.0  
1.8  
3.6  
1.9  
V
V
Supply Voltage  
Digital Supply Current with CPU Active V = 1.8 V, Clock = 25 MHz  
4.3  
TBD  
5.0  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
DD  
2
V
V
= 1.8 V, Clock = 1 MHz  
= 3.0 V, Clock = 25 MHz  
DD  
DD  
TBD  
2
V
= 3.0 V, Clock = 1 MHz  
DD  
2
2
Digital Supply Current with CPU Inac-  
tive (not accessing EPROM)  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
V
V
V
V
= 1.8 V, Clock = 25 MHz  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
2
= 1.8 V, Clock = 1 MHz  
= 3.0 V, Clock = 25 MHz  
2
= 3.0 V, Clock = 1 MHz  
Digital Supply Current (shutdown)  
Oscillator not running,  
Internal Regulator Off  
TBD  
TBD  
µA  
V
Digital Supply RAM Data Retention  
Voltage  
Specified Operating Temperature  
Range  
–40  
+85  
°C  
3
0
25  
60  
MHz  
%
SYSCLK (system clock frequency)  
SYSCLK Duty Cycle  
40  
Notes:  
1. Analog performance is degraded when VDD is below 1.8 V.  
2. Specifications below 2 MHz or with CPU Inactive assume memory power controller is enabled.  
3. SYSCLK must be at least 32 kHz to enable debugging.  
Other electrical characteristics tables are found in the data sheet section corresponding to the associated  
peripherals. For more information on electrical characteristics for a specific peripheral, refer to the page  
indicated in Table 3.2.  
24  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 3.2. Index to Electrical Characteristics Tables  
Table Title  
Page  
No.  
ADC0 Electrical Characteristics  
44  
46  
External Voltage Reference Circuit Electrical Characteristics  
Comparator0 Electrical Characteristics  
Reset Electrical Characteristics  
52  
86  
EPROM Electrical Characteristics  
87  
Internal Oscillator Electrical Characteristics  
Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics  
92  
104  
Rev. 0.5  
25  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
4. Pinout and Package Definitions  
Table 4.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Pin Number Pin Number  
Name  
Type  
Description  
QFN-11  
SOIC-14  
1
5
VREF / A In  
External Voltage Reference Input.  
P0.0  
P0.1  
D I/O or A In Port 0.0. See Section 13 for complete description.  
D I/O or A In Port 0.1. See Section 13 for complete description.  
Power Supply Voltage.  
2
3
6
7
V
DD  
4
8
V
/
A In  
V
Programming Supply Voltage  
PP  
PP  
D I/O or A In  
P0.2  
Port 0.2. See Section 13 for complete description.  
5
10  
EXTCLK/ D I/O or A I/O This pin can be used as the external clock input for  
CMOS, RC, or Capacitor configurations. See Sec-  
tion 12.2.  
P0.3  
P0.4  
P0.5  
D I/O or A In Port 0.3. See Section 13 for complete description.  
D I/O or A In Port 0.4. See Section 13 for complete description.  
D I/O or A In Port 0.5. See Section 13 for complete description.  
6
7
8
12  
13  
14  
C2CK / D I/O  
Clock signal for the C2 Development Interface.  
RST  
D I/O  
Device Reset. Open-drain output of internal POR  
or V monitor. An external source can initiate a  
DD  
system reset by driving this pin low for at least 10  
µs.  
9
1
2
P0.6  
D I/O or A In Port 0.6. See Section 13 for complete description.  
Data signal for the C2 Development Interface.  
10  
C2D / D I/O  
P0.7  
GND  
NC  
D I/O or A In Port 0.7. See Section 13 for complete description.  
11  
3
Ground.  
4, 9, 11  
No Connection  
26  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
C2D /  
P0.7  
VREF /  
P0.0  
P0.6 /  
CNVSTR  
P0.1  
VDD  
C2CK /  
/RST  
GND  
VPP /  
P0.2  
P0.5  
P0.4  
EXTCLK  
/ P0.3  
Figure 4.1. QFN-11 Pinout Diagram (Top View)  
Rev. 0.5  
27  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Bottom View  
Table 4.2. QFN-11  
Package Dimensions  
E2  
b
MM  
E3  
L
Min  
0.80  
0
0
0.18  
Typ  
0.90  
0.02  
0.65  
0.25  
0.23  
3.00  
2.20  
2.00  
0.386  
3.00  
1.36  
1.135  
0.5  
Max  
1.00  
0.05  
1.00  
0.30  
2.25  
A
A1  
A2  
A3  
b
D
D2  
D3  
D4  
E
E2  
E3  
e
R
k
k
L
LB  
LT  
R
0.45  
0.09  
0.27  
0.55  
0.36  
0.37  
0.65  
e
E
Side E View  
e
Side D View  
e
Figure 4.2. QFN-11 Package Drawing  
28  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
TOP VIEW  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
P0.6  
C2D/P0.7  
GND  
C2CK/RST  
P0.5  
P0.4  
N/C  
N/C  
P0.0  
P0.3  
P0.1  
N/C  
8
VDD  
P0.2/VPP  
Figure 4.3. SOIC-14 Pinout Diagram (Top View)  
Rev. 0.5  
29  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 4.3. SOIC-14 Package  
Dimensions  
D
MM  
Min  
1.35  
0.10  
1.25  
0.31  
Typ  
Max  
1.75  
0.25  
1.65  
0.51  
14  
8
7
A
A1  
A2  
b
D
E
E1  
e
L
E1 E  
8.65 BSC  
6.00 BSC  
3.90 BSC  
1.27  
PIN 1  
IDENTIFIER  
1
0.40  
1.27  
Top View  
L1  
1.04 REF  
A2  
A
L
A1  
L1  
b
e
Side View  
Figure 4.4. SOIC-14 Package Drawing  
30  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
5. ADC0 - 10-Bit SAR ADC (C8051T600/2/4 Only)  
The ADC0 subsystem for the C8051T600/2/4 devices consists an analog multiplexer (referred to as  
AMUX0) with 10 input selection options, a gain stage programmable to 1x or 0.5x, and a 500 ksps, 10-bit  
successive-approximation-register (SAR) ADC with integrated track-and-hold and programmable window  
detector (see block diagram in Figure 5.1). The multiplexer, data conversion modes and window detector  
are all configurable under software control via the Special Function Registers shown in Figure 5.1. ADC0  
may be configured to measure any Port pin, the Temperature Sensor output, or VDD with respect to GND.  
The ADC0 subsystem is enabled only when the AD0EN bit in the ADC0 Control register (ADC0CN) is set  
to logic 1. The ADC0 subsystem remains in a low power shutdown state when this bit is logic 0. A special  
8-bit mode is also provided for backwards-compatibility with the C8051F300 development platform.  
ADC0CN  
AMX0SL  
VDD  
000  
001  
010  
011  
1xx  
AD0BUSY (W)  
Timer 0 Overflow  
Timer 2 Overflow  
Timer 1 Overflow  
CNVSTR Input  
Start  
Conversion  
P0.0  
P0.1  
P0.2  
P0.3  
P0.4  
P0.5  
P0.6  
P0.7  
10-Bit  
SAR  
10-to-1  
AMUX  
X1 or  
X0.5  
10  
ADC  
Temp  
Sensor  
AD0WINT  
VDD  
Comb.  
Logic  
20  
ADC0LTH:L  
ADC0CF  
ADC0GTH:L  
Figure 5.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
31  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
5.1. Analog Multiplexer  
The analog multiplexer (AMUX0) selects the positive input to the ADC, allowing any Port pin to be mea-  
sured relative to GND. Additionally, the on-chip temperature sensor or the positive power supply (VDD  
)
may be selected as the positive ADC input. The ADC0 input channel is selected in the AMX0SL register as  
described in Figure 5.3. When an external Voltage Reference is supplied to P0.0 or the internal regulator is  
used as VREF, the VDD Voltage supply can be determined by taking a measurement of VDD with the gain  
setting at 0.5x.  
Important Note About ADC0 Input Configuration: Port pins selected as ADC0 inputs should be config-  
ured as analog inputs and should be skipped by the Digital Crossbar. To configure a Port pin for analog  
input, clear the corresponding bit in register P0MDIN to ‘0’. To force the Crossbar to skip a Port pin, set the  
corresponding bit in register XBR0 to ‘1’. See Section “13. Port Input/Output” on page 97 for more Port  
I/O configuration details.  
5.2. Gain Setting  
The ADC has gain settings of 1x and 0.5x. In 1x mode, the full scale reading of the ADC is determined  
directly by VREF. In 0.5x mode, the full-scale reading of the ADC occurs when the input voltage is VREF x 2.  
The 0.5x gain setting can be useful to obtain a higher input Voltage range when using a small VREF volt-  
age, or to measure input voltages that are between VREF and VDD. Gain settings for the ADC are con-  
trolled by the AMP0GN1–0 bits in register ADC0CF.  
5.3. Output Coding  
The conversion code format for the ADC is shown below. Conversion codes are represented as 10-bit  
unsigned integers. Inputs are measured from ‘0’ to VREF x 1023/1024. All conversions are left-justified in  
the ADC0H and ADC0L registers (ADC0H holds the 8 most significant bits, and the two least significant  
bits are stored in ADC0L). Example codes are shown below.  
Input Voltage  
(AIN – GND),  
Gain = 1  
10-bit Output (Conversion Code)  
ADC0H:ADC0L Register Coding  
VREF x 1023/1024  
0x3FF  
0x200  
0x100  
0x00  
0xFF : 0xC0  
0x80 : 0x00  
0x40 : 0x00  
0x00 : 0x00  
VREF/2  
VREF/4  
0
5.4. 8-Bit Compatibility Mode  
Setting the ADC08BE bit in register ADC0CF to ‘1’ will put the ADC in 8-bit compatibility mode. This mode  
allows backward compatibility with the C8051F300 device family. In 8-bit compatibility mode, only the 8  
MSBs of data are converted. The two LSBs of a conversion are always ‘00’ in this mode, and the ADC0L  
register will always read back 0x00. 8-bit conversions take two fewer SAR clock cycles than 10-bit conver-  
sions, so the conversion is completed faster, and a 500 ksps sampling rate can be achieved with a slower  
SAR clock.  
32  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
5.5. Temperature Sensor  
The temperature sensor transfer function is shown in Figure 5.2. The output voltage (VTEMP) is the ADC  
input when the temperature sensor is selected by bits AMX0P2–0 in register AMX0SL. Values for the Off-  
set and Slope parameters can be found in Table 5.1.  
VTEMP = (Slope x TempC) + Offset  
TempC = (VTEMP - Offset) / Slope  
Slope (V / deg C)  
Offset (V at 0 Celsius)  
Temperature  
Figure 5.2. Temperature Sensor Transfer Function  
5.5.1. Calibration  
The uncalibrated temperature sensor output is extremely linear and suitable for relative temperature mea-  
surements (see Table 5.1 for linearity specifications). For absolute temperature measurements, offset and/  
or gain calibration is recommended. Typically a 1-point (offset) calibration includes the following steps:  
Step 1. Control/measure the ambient temperature (this temperature must be known).  
Step 2. Power the device, and delay for a few seconds to allow for self-heating.  
Step 3. Perform an ADC conversion with the temperature sensor selected as the positive input  
and GND selected as the negative input.  
Step 4. Calculate the offset characteristics, and store this value in non-volatile memory for use  
with subsequent temperature sensor measurements.  
Figure 5.3 shows the typical temperature sensor error assuming a 1-point calibration at 25 °C. Parame-  
ters that affect ADC measurement, in particular the voltage reference value, will also affect temper-  
ature measurement.  
A single-point offset measurement of the temperature sensor is performed on each device during produc-  
tion test. The measurement is performed at 25 °C ±TBD °C, using the ADC with the internal regulator  
selected as the Voltage Reference. The direct ADC result of the measurement is stored in the SFR regis-  
ters TOFFH and TOFFL, shown in SFR Definition 5.1 and SFR Definition 5.2.  
Rev. 0.5  
33  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
5.00  
4.00  
3.00  
2.00  
1.00  
0.00  
5.00  
4.00  
3.00  
2.00  
1.00  
0.00  
-1.00  
-2.00  
-3.00  
-4.00  
-5.00  
40.00  
-40.00  
-20.00  
0.00  
60.00  
80.00  
20.00  
-1.00  
-2.00  
-3.00  
-4.00  
-5.00  
Temperature (degrees C)  
Figure 5.3. Temperature Sensor Error with 1-Point Calibration (V  
= 2.4 V)  
REF  
SFR Definition 5.1. TOFFH: Temperature Offset Measurement High Byte  
R/W  
TOFF9  
Bit7  
R/W  
TOFF8  
Bit6  
R/W  
TOFF7  
Bit5  
R/W  
TOFF6  
Bit4  
R/W  
TOFF5  
Bit3  
R/W  
TOFF4  
Bit2  
R/W  
TOFF3  
Bit1  
R/W  
TOFF2  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
Varies  
SFR Address:  
0xA3  
Bits7–0: Bits 9–2 of temperature sensor measurement.  
The temperature sensor offset measurement is taken during production test of the device.  
The measurement is intended to be used as an offset correction for the temperature sensor.  
It is taken under the conditions VREF = VREG; TAMB = 25 °C ± TBD °C. One LSB of the tem-  
perature sensor offset measurement is equivalent to one LSB of the ADC output under the  
measurement conditions.  
34  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 5.2. TOFFL: Temperature Offset Measurement Low Byte  
R/W  
TOFF1  
Bit7  
R/W  
TOFF0  
Bit6  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
Varies  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xA2  
Bits7–6: Bits 1-0 of temperature sensor offset measurement.  
Bits5–0: Read: 000000b, Write = Don’t Care  
The temperature sensor offset measurement is taken during production test of the device.  
The measurement is intended to be used as an offset correction for the temperature sensor.  
It is taken under the conditions VREF = VREG; TAMB = 25 °C ± TBD °C. One LSB of the  
temperature sensor offset measurement is equivalent to one LSB of the ADC output under  
the measurement conditions.  
Rev. 0.5  
35  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
5.6. Modes of Operation  
ADC0 has a maximum sampling rate of 500 ksps. The ADC0 SAR clock is a divided version of the system  
clock, determined by the AD0SC bits in the ADC0CF register (system clock divided by (AD0SC + 1) for  
0 AD0SC 31).  
5.6.1. Starting a Conversion  
A conversion can be initiated in one of five ways, depending on the programmed states of the ADC0 Start  
of Conversion Mode bits (AD0CM2–0) in register ADC0CN. Conversions may be initiated by one of the fol-  
lowing:  
1. Writing a ‘1’ to the AD0BUSY bit of register ADC0CN  
2. A Timer 0 overflow (i.e., timed continuous conversions)  
3. A Timer 2 overflow  
4. A Timer 1 overflow  
5. A rising edge on the CNVSTR input signal (pin P0.6)  
Writing a ‘1’ to AD0BUSY provides software control of ADC0 whereby conversions are performed "on-  
demand". During conversion, the AD0BUSY bit is set to logic 1 and reset to logic 0 when the conversion is  
complete. The falling edge of AD0BUSY triggers an interrupt (when enabled) and sets the ADC0 interrupt  
flag (AD0INT).  
Note: When polling for ADC conversion completions, the ADC0 interrupt flag (AD0INT) should be used. Converted  
data is available in the ADC0 data register, ADC0, when bit AD0INT is logic 1. Note that when Timer 2  
overflows are used as the conversion source, Timer 2 Low Byte overflows are used if Timer 2 is in 8-bit mode;  
Timer 2 High byte overflows are used if Timer 2 is in 16-bit mode. See Section “16. Timers” on page 131  
for timer configuration.  
Important Note About Using CNVSTR: The CNVSTR input pin also functions as Port pin P0.6. When the  
CNVSTR input is used as the ADC0 conversion source, Port pin P0.6 should be skipped by the Digital  
Crossbar. To configure the Crossbar to skip P0.6, set to ‘1’ Bit6 in register XBR0. See Section “13. Port  
Input/Output” on page 97 for details on Port I/O configuration.  
36  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
5.6.2. Tracking Modes  
The AD0TM bit in register ADC0CN enables "delayed conversions", and will delay the actual conversion  
start by three SAR clock cycles, during which time the ADC will continue to track the input. If AD0TM is left  
at logic 0, a conversion will begin immediately, without the extra tracking time. For internal start-of-conver-  
sion sources, the ADC will track anytime it is not performing a conversion. When the CNVSTR signal is  
used to initiate conversions, ADC0 will track either when AD0TM is logic 1, or when AD0TM is logic 0 and  
CNVSTR is held low. See Figure 5.4 for track and convert timing details. Delayed conversion mode is use-  
ful when AMUX settings are frequently changed, due to the settling time requirements described in Sec-  
tion “5.6.3. Settling Time Requirements” on page 38.  
A. ADC Timing for External Trigger Source  
CNVSTR  
(AD0CM[2:0] = 1xx)  
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15* 16 17  
SAR  
Clocks  
AD0TM = 1  
Track  
Convert  
Track  
*Conversion Ends at rising edge of 15th clock in 8-bit Compatibility Mode  
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12* 13 14  
SAR Clocks  
AD0TM = 0 N/C  
Track  
Convert  
N/C  
*Conversion Ends at rising edge of 12th clock in 8-bit Compatibility Mode  
B. ADC Timing for Internal Trigger Source  
Write '1' to AD0BUSY,  
Timer 0, Timer 2, Timer 1 Overflow  
(AD0CM[2:0] = 000, 001, 010, 011)  
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15* 16 17  
SAR  
Clocks  
Track  
Convert  
Track  
AD0TM = 1  
*Conversion Ends at rising edge of 15th clock in 8-bit Compatibility Mode  
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12* 13 14  
SAR  
Clocks  
Track or  
Convert  
AD0TM = 0  
Convert  
Track  
*Conversion Ends at rising edge of 12th clock in 8-bit Compatibility Mode  
Figure 5.4. ADC Tracking and Conversion Timing  
Rev. 0.5  
37  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
5.6.3. Settling Time Requirements  
A minimum amount of tracking time is required before each conversion can be performed, to allow the  
sampling capacitor voltage to settle. This tracking time is determined by the AMUX0 resistance, the ADC0  
sampling capacitance, any external source resistance, and the accuracy required for the conversion. Note  
that in delayed tracking mode, an additional three SAR clocks are used for tracking at the start of every  
conversion. For many applications, these three SAR clocks will meet the minimum tracking time require-  
ments, and higher values for the external source impedance will increase the required tracking time.  
Figure 5.5 shows the equivalent ADC0 input circuit. The required ADC0 settling time for a given settling  
accuracy (SA) may be approximated by Equation 5.1. When measuring the Temperature Sensor output or  
VDD with respect to GND, RTOTAL reduces to RMUX. See Table 5.1 for ADC0 minimum settling time (track/  
hold time) requirements.  
2n  
SA  
------  
t = ln  
× RTOTALCSAMPLE  
Equation 5.1. ADC0 Settling Time Requirements  
Where:  
SA is the settling accuracy, given as a fraction of an LSB (for example, 0.25 to settle within 1/4 LSB)  
t is the required settling time in seconds  
RTOTAL is the sum of the AMUX0 resistance and any external source resistance.  
n is the ADC resolution in bits (10).  
MUX Select  
P0.x  
RMUX = 5k  
CSAMPLE = 5pF  
RCInput= RMUX * CSAMPLE  
Note: When the PGA gain is set to 0.5, CSAMPLE = 3pF  
Figure 5.5. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits  
38  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 5.3. AMX0SL: AMUX0 Channel Select  
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
AMX0P3 AMX0P2 AMX0P1 AMX0P0 10000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xBB  
Bits7–4: Unused.  
Bits3–0: AMX0P3–0: AMUX0 Positive Input Selection.  
0000–1001b: ADC0 Positive Input selected per the chart below.  
1010–1111b: RESERVED.  
AMX0P3–0  
0000  
ADC0 Positive Input  
P0.0  
0001  
P0.1  
0010  
P0.2  
0011  
P0.3  
0100  
P0.4  
0101  
P0.5  
0110  
0111  
P0.6  
P0.7  
1000  
Temperature Sensor  
VDD  
1001  
Rev. 0.5  
39  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 5.4. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
AD0SC4 AD0SC3 AD0SC2 AD0SC1 AD0SC0 AD08BE AMP0GN1 AMP0GN0 11111000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xBC  
Bits7–3: AD0SC4–0: ADC0 SAR Conversion Clock Period Bits.  
SAR Conversion clock is derived from system clock by the following equation, where  
AD0SC refers to the 5-bit value held in bits AD0SC4–0. SAR Conversion clock require-  
ments are given in Table 5.1.  
Note: if the OTP Power Controller is enabled (OTPPCE = '1'), AD0SC must be set to at  
least "00001" for proper ADC operation.  
SYSCLK  
CLKSAR  
---------------------  
AD0SC =  
– 1  
Bit2:  
AD08BE: 8-Bit Mode Enable.  
0: ADC operates in 10-bit mode (normal).  
1: ADC operates in 8-bit mode.  
Bits1–0: AMP0GN1–0: ADC Gain Control Bits.  
00: Gain = 0.5  
01: Gain = 1  
SFR Definition 5.5. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word High Byte  
R/W  
D9  
Bit7  
R/W  
D8  
R/W  
D7  
Bit5  
R/W  
D6  
R/W  
D5  
R/W  
D4  
Bit2  
R/W  
D3  
R/W  
D2  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xBE  
Bit6  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit1  
Bit0  
Bits7–0: ADC0 Data Word bits 9–2.  
ADC0H holds the upper 8 bits of output data from the most recently completed ADC0 con-  
version. In 8-bit compatibility mode, the ADC0H register holds all 8 bits of the conversion  
data word.  
SFR Definition 5.6. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word Low Byte  
R/W  
D1  
Bit7  
R/W  
D0  
R
-
R
-
R
-
R
-
R
-
R
-
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xBD  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
Bits7–6: ADC0 Data Word bits 1–0.  
Bits5–0: Read: 000000b, Write = Don’t Care  
ADC0L holds the lowest 2 bits of output data from the most recently completed ADC0 con-  
version. In 8-bit compatibility mode, the ADC0L register always returns 0x00.  
40  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 5.7. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control  
R/W  
AD0EN  
Bit7  
R/W  
AD0TM  
Bit6  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
AD0INT AD0BUSY AD0WINT AD0CM2 AD0CM1 AD0CM0 00000000  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
Bit Addressable  
0xE8  
Bit7:  
AD0EN: ADC0 Enable Bit.  
0: ADC0 Disabled. ADC0 is in low-power shutdown.  
1: ADC0 Enabled. ADC0 is active and ready for data conversions.  
AD0TM: ADC0 Track Mode Bit.  
Bit6:  
0: Normal Track Mode: When ADC0 is enabled, a start-of-conversion signal begins the con-  
version. For internal conversion start sources, tracking is continuous whenever a conversion  
is not in progress. For external CNVSTR signal, tracking of the input occurs when CNVSTR  
is held low.  
1: Delayed Track Mode: When ADC0 is enabled, input is tracked when a conversion is not  
in progress. A start-of-conversion signal initiates three SAR clocks of additional tracking,  
and then begins the conversion.  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
AD0INT: ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag.  
0: ADC0 has not completed a data conversion since the last time AD0INT was cleared.  
1: ADC0 has completed a data conversion.  
AD0BUSY: ADC0 Busy Bit.  
Read: Unused.  
Write:  
0: No Effect.  
1: Initiates ADC0 Conversion if AD0CM2–0 = 000b  
AD0WINT: ADC0 Window Compare Interrupt Flag.  
0: ADC0 Window Comparison Data match has not occurred since this flag was last cleared.  
1: ADC0 Window Comparison Data match has occurred.  
Bit3:  
Bits2–0: AD0CM2–0: ADC0 Start of Conversion Mode Select.  
000: ADC0 conversion initiated on every write of ‘1’ to AD0BUSY.  
001: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 0.  
010: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 2.  
011: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 1.  
1xx: ADC0 conversion initiated on rising edge of external CNVSTR.  
Note: Start of conversion is delayed by three SAR clock cycles when AD0TM = 1.  
Rev. 0.5  
41  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
5.7. Programmable Window Detector  
The ADC Programmable Window Detector continuously compares the ADC0 output to user-programmed  
limits, and notifies the system when a desired condition is detected. This is especially effective in an inter-  
rupt-driven system, saving code space and CPU bandwidth while delivering faster system response times.  
The window detector interrupt flag (AD0WINT in register ADC0CN) can also be used in polled mode. The  
ADC0 Greater-Than (ADC0GTH, ADC0GTL) and Less-Than (ADC0LTH, ADC0LTL) registers hold the  
comparison values. Example comparisons are shown in Figure 5.6. Notice that the window detector flag  
can be programmed to indicate when measured data is inside or outside of the user-programmed limits  
depending on the contents of the ADC0LTH:L and ADC0GTH:L registers.  
5.7.1. Window Detector Example  
Figure 5.6 shows two example window comparisons, using the ADC in 10-bit 1x gain mode. The ADC out-  
put codes represent input voltages (AIN – GND) from 0 V to VREF x (1023/1024) and are represented as  
10-bit unsigned integers. Note that the hexadecimal numbers shown are left-justified, 10-bit values. In the  
example on the left-hand side, an AD0WINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC0 conversion word  
(ADC0H:L) is within the range defined by ADC0GTH:L and ADC0LTH:L (if 0x1000 < ADC0H:L < 0x2000).  
In the example on the right-hand side, an AD0WINT interrupt will be generated if ADC0 is outside of the  
range defined by ADC0GTH:L and ADC0LTH:L (if ADC0H:L < 0x1000 or ADC0H:L > 0x2000).  
ADC0H:L  
0xFFC0  
ADC0H:L  
0xFFC0  
Input Voltage  
(AIN+ - GND)  
Input Voltage  
(AIN+ - GND)  
REF x (1023/1204)  
REF x (1023/1024)  
AD0WINT  
not affected  
AD0WINT=1  
0x2040  
0x2040  
REF x (1/8)  
0x2000  
0x1FC0  
ADC0LTH:L  
ADC0GTH:L  
REF x (1/8)  
0x2000  
0x1FC0  
ADC0GTH:L  
AD0WINT  
not affected  
AD0WINT=1  
0x1040  
0x1000  
0x1040  
0x1000  
REF x (1/16)  
REF x (1/16)  
ADC0LTH:L  
0x0FC0  
0x0FC0  
AD0WINT=1  
AD0WINT  
not affected  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0
0
Figure 5.6. ADC Window Compare Examples  
42  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 5.8. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
11111111  
SFR Address:  
0xC4  
Bits7–0: ADC0 Greater-Than High Byte.  
SFR Definition 5.9. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
11000000  
SFR Address:  
0xC3  
Bits7–0: ADC0 Greater-Than Low Byte. In 8-bit compatibility mode, this register should be set to 0x00.  
SFR Definition 5.10. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xC6  
Bits7–0: ADC0 Less-Than High Byte.  
SFR Definition 5.11. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xC5  
Bits7–0: ADC0 Less-Than Low Byte. In 8-bit compatibility mode, this register should be set to 0x00.  
Rev. 0.5  
43  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 5.1. ADC0 Electrical Characteristics  
VDD = 3.0 V, VREF = 2.50 V (REFSL = 0), PGA Gain = 1, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
DC Accuracy  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Resolution  
10  
bits  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
Integral Nonlinearity  
Differential Nonlinearity  
Offset Error1  
±0.5  
±0.5  
TBD  
±1  
±1  
Guaranteed Monotonic  
TBD  
Full Scale Error1  
TBD  
TBD  
LSB  
Dynamic Performance (10 kHz sine-wave input, 1 dB below Full Scale, 500 ksps)  
Signal-to-Noise Plus Distortion  
Total Harmonic Distortion  
Spurious-Free Dynamic Range  
Conversion Rate  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
dB  
dB  
dB  
Up to the 5th harmonic  
SAR Conversion Clock2,3  
8.33  
MHz  
10-bit Mode  
8-bit Mode  
13  
11  
clocks  
clocks  
Conversion Time in SAR Clocks  
VDD > 2.0 V  
VDD < 2.0 V  
300  
2.0  
0.3  
ns  
µs  
Track/Hold Acquisition Time  
Throughput Rate3  
500  
ksps  
Analog Inputs  
Absolute Voltage on External  
ADC Input  
VDD + 0.3  
VREF  
GND – 0.3  
0
V
V
Input Voltage Range (Gain = 1x) AIN – GND  
1x Gain  
SAR Sampling Capacitor  
0.5x Gain  
5
3
pF  
pF  
Temperature Sensor  
Linearity1,4  
Slope4  
Slope Error1,4  
Offset4  
TBD  
3.2  
°C  
mV / °C  
µV/C  
mV  
±80  
903  
±10  
Temp = 0 °C  
Offset Error1,4  
Temp = 0 °C  
mV  
Power Specifications  
Power Supply Current  
(VDD supplied to ADC0)  
Operating Mode, 500 ksps  
400  
900  
µA  
Power Supply Rejection  
TBD  
mV/V  
Notes:  
1. Represents mean ± one standard deviation.  
2. When using the C8051F300 for code development, SAR clock should be limited to 6 MHz.  
3. See Section “18. Revision Specific Behavior” on page 159.  
4. Includes ADC offset, gain, and linearity variations.  
44  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
6. Voltage Reference Options  
The voltage reference MUX is configurable to use an externally connected voltage reference, the unregu-  
lated power supply voltage (VDD), or the regulated 1.8 V internal supply (see Figure 6.1). The REFSL bit in  
the Reference Control register (REF0CN) selects the reference source. For an external source, REFSL  
should be set to ‘0’; For VDD as the reference source, REFSL should be set to ‘1’. To override this selec-  
tion, and use the internal regulator as the reference source, the REGOVR bit can be set to ‘1’. See  
Figure 6.1 for REF0CN register details. The electrical specifications for the voltage reference circuit are  
given in Table 6.1.  
Important Note About the VREF Input: Port pin P0.0 is used as the external VREF input. When using an  
external voltage reference, P0.0 should be configured as analog input and skipped by the Digital Crossbar.  
To configure P0.0 as analog input, set to ‘1’ Bit0 in register P0MDIN. To configure the Crossbar to skip  
P0.0, set to ‘1’ Bit0 in register XBR0. Refer to Section “13. Port Input/Output” on page 97 for complete  
Port I/O configuration details. The external reference voltage must be within the range 0 VREF VDD  
.
On C8051T600/2 devices, the temperature sensor connects to the highest order input of the ADC0 positive  
input multiplexer (see Section “5.1. Analog Multiplexer” on page 32 for details). The TEMPE bit in regis-  
ter REF0CN enables/disables the temperature sensor. While disabled, the temperature sensor defaults to  
a high impedance state and any ADC0 measurements performed on the sensor result in meaningless  
data.  
REF0CN  
EN  
VDD  
Temp Sensor  
To Analog Mux  
External  
Voltage  
Reference  
Circuit  
R1  
REGOVR  
0
VREF  
0
1
GND  
VREF  
(to ADC)  
VDD  
Internal  
Regulator  
1
Figure 6.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
45  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 6.1. REF0CN: Reference Control  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
TEMPE  
Bit2  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xD1  
REGOVR REFSL  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit1  
Bit0  
Bits7–5: UNUSED. Read = 000b; Write = don’t care.  
Bit4:  
REGOVR: Regulator Reference Override.  
This bit “overrides” the REFSL bit, and allows the internal regulator to be used as a refer-  
ence source.  
0: The voltage reference source is selected by the REFSL bit.  
1: The internal regulator is used as the voltage reference, regardless of the REFSL setting.  
REFSL: Voltage Reference Select.  
This bit selects the source for the internal voltage reference when REGOVR is set to ‘0’.  
0: VREF input pin used as voltage reference.  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
1: VDD used as voltage reference.  
TEMPE: Temperature Sensor Enable Bit.  
0: Internal Temperature Sensor off.  
1: Internal Temperature Sensor on.  
Bits1-0: UNUSED. Read = 00b. Write = don’t care.  
Table 6.1. External Voltage Reference Circuit Electrical Characteristics  
VDD = 3.0 V; –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Input Voltage Range  
Input Current  
Conditions  
Min  
0
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
VDD  
Sample Rate = 500 ksps; VREF = 2.5 V  
12  
µA  
46  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
7. Comparator0  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include an on-chip programmable voltage comparator, which is shown in  
Figure 7.1. Comparator0 offers programmable response time and hysteresis, an analog input multiplexer,  
and two outputs that are optionally available at the Port pins: a synchronous “latched” output (CP0), or an  
asynchronous “raw” output (CP0A). The asynchronous CP0A signal is available even when the system  
clock is not active. This allows Comparator0 to operate and generate an output with the device in STOP  
mode (when the internal regulator is still active). When assigned to a Port pin, the Comparator0 output may  
be configured as open drain or push-pull (see Section “13.2. Port I/O Initialization” on page 99).  
Comparator0 may also be used as a reset source (see Section “10.5. Comparator0 Reset” on page 83).  
The inputs for Comparator0 are selected in the CPT0MX register (SFR Definition 7.2). The CMX0P1–  
CMX0P0 bits select the Comparator0 positive input; the CMX0N1–CMX0N0 bits select the Comparator0  
negative input.  
Important Note About Comparator Inputs: The Port pins selected as comparator inputs should be con-  
figured as analog inputs in their associated Port configuration register, and configured to be skipped by the  
Crossbar (for details on Port configuration, see Section “13.3. General Purpose Port I/O” on page 102).  
CP0EN  
CP0OUT  
CP0RIF  
CP0FIF  
VDD  
CP0HYP1  
CP0HYP0  
CP0HYN1  
CP0HYN0  
CMX0N1  
CMX0N0  
CMX0P1  
CMX0P0  
CP0  
Rising-edge  
Interrupt Flag  
CP0  
Falling-edge  
Interrupt Flag  
P0.0  
P0.2  
P0.4  
P0.6  
CP0 +  
Interrupt  
Logic  
CP0  
+
-
SET  
CLR  
SET  
CLR  
D
Q
Q
D
Q
Q
Crossbar  
P0.1  
P0.3  
P0.5  
P0.7  
(SYNCHRONIZER)  
GND  
CP0 -  
CP0A  
Reset  
Decision  
Tree  
CP0MD1  
CP0MD0  
Figure 7.1. Comparator0 Functional Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
47  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
The output of Comparator0 can be polled in software, used as an interrupt source, and/or routed to a Port  
pin. When routed to a Port pin, the Comparator0 output is available asynchronous or synchronous to the  
system clock; the asynchronous output is available even in STOP mode (with no system clock active).  
When disabled, the Comparator0 output (if assigned to a Port I/O pin via the Crossbar) defaults to the logic  
low state. See Section “13.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 98 for details on configuring the  
Comparator0 output via the digital Crossbar. Comparator0 inputs can be externally driven from –0.25 V to  
(VDD + 0.25 V) without damage or upset. The complete electrical specifications for Comparator0 are given  
in Table 7.1.  
The Comparator0 response time may be configured in software via the CP0MD1–0 bits in register  
CPT0MD (see SFR Definition 7.3). Selecting a longer response time reduces the amount of power con-  
sumed by Comparator0. See Table 7.1 for complete timing and power consumption specifications.  
CP0+  
VIN+  
VIN-  
+
CP0  
_
OUT  
CP0-  
CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION  
Positive Hysteresis Voltage  
(Programmed with CP0HYP Bits)  
VIN-  
Negative Hysteresis Voltage  
INPUTS  
(Programmed by CP0HYN Bits)  
VIN+  
VOH  
OUTPUT  
VOL  
Negative Hysteresis  
Disabled  
Maximum  
Negative Hysteresis  
Positive Hysteresis  
Disabled  
Maximum  
Positive Hysteresis  
Figure 7.2. Comparator Hysteresis Plot  
The hysteresis of Comparator0 is software-programmable via its Comparator0 Control register (CPT0CN).  
The user can program both the amount of hysteresis voltage (referred to the input voltage) and the positive  
and negative-going symmetry of this hysteresis around the threshold voltage.  
The Comparator0 hysteresis is programmed using Bits3–0 in the Comparator0 Control Register CPT0CN  
(shown in SFR Definition 7.1). The amount of negative hysteresis voltage is determined by the settings of  
the CP0HYN bits. The amount of positive hysteresis can be programmed using the CP0HYP bits.  
Comparator0 interrupts can be generated on both rising-edge and falling-edge output transitions. (For  
Interrupt enable and priority control, see Section “9.3. Interrupt Handler” on page 70). The CP0FIF flag  
is set to logic 1 upon a Comparator0 falling-edge interrupt, and the CP0RIF flag is set to logic 1 upon the  
48  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Comparator0 rising-edge interrupt. Once set, these bits remain set until cleared by software. The output  
state of Comparator0 can be obtained at any time by reading the CP0OUT bit. Comparator0 is enabled by  
setting the CP0EN bit to logic 1, and is disabled by clearing this bit to logic 0.  
SFR Definition 7.1. CPT0CN: Comparator0 Control  
R/W  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
CP0EN CP0OUT CP0RIF CP0FIF CP0HYP1 CP0HYP0 CP0HYN1 CP0HYN0 00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xF8  
Bit7:  
CP0EN: Comparator0 Enable Bit.  
0: Comparator0 Disabled.  
1: Comparator0 Enabled.  
Bit6:  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
CP0OUT: Comparator0 Output State Flag.  
0: Voltage on CP0+ < CP0–.  
1: Voltage on CP0+ > CP0–.  
CP0RIF: Comparator0 Rising-Edge Interrupt Flag.  
0: No Comparator0 Rising Edge Interrupt has occurred since this flag was last cleared.  
1: Comparator0 Rising Edge Interrupt has occurred.  
CP0FIF: Comparator0 Falling-Edge Interrupt Flag.  
0: No Comparator0 Falling-Edge Interrupt has occurred since this flag was last cleared.  
1: Comparator0 Falling-Edge Interrupt has occurred.  
Bits3–2: CP0HYP1–0: Comparator0 Positive Hysteresis Control Bits.  
00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled.  
01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV.  
10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV.  
11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV.  
Bits1–0: CP0HYN1–0: Comparator0 Negative Hysteresis Control Bits.  
00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled.  
01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV.  
10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV.  
11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV.  
Rev. 0.5  
49  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 7.2. CPT0MX: Comparator0 MUX Selection  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
CMX0N1 CMX0N0  
CMX0P1 CMX0P0 00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0x9F  
Bits7–6: UNUSED. Read = 00b, Write = don’t care.  
Bits6–4: CMX0N1–CMX0N0: Comparator0 Negative Input MUX Select.  
These bits select which Port pin is used as the Comparator0 negative input.  
CMX0N1 CMX0N0 Negative Input  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
P0.1  
P0.3  
P0.5  
P0.7  
Bits3–2: UNUSED. Read = 00b, Write = don’t care.  
Bits1–0: CMX0P1–CMX0P0: Comparator0 Positive Input MUX Select.  
These bits select which Port pin is used as the Comparator0 positive input.  
CMX0P1 CMX0P0 Positive Input  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
P0.0  
P0.2  
P0.4  
P0.6  
50  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 7.3. CPT0MD: Comparator0 Mode Selection  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
CP0MD1 CP0MD0 00000010  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0x9D  
Bits7–2: UNUSED. Read = 000000b, Write = don’t care.  
Bits1–0: CP0MD1–CP0MD0: Comparator0 Mode Select.  
These bits select the response time and power consumption for Comparator0.  
Mode  
CP0MD1 CP0MD0  
CP0 Response Time / Power Setting*  
0
1
2
3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Fastest Response Time  
Lowest Power Consumption  
*Note: See Table 7.1 for response time and power consumption values.  
Rev. 0.5  
51  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 7.1. Comparator0 Electrical Characteristics  
VDD = 3.0 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Response Time:  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
100  
Max  
Units  
ns  
CP0+ – CP0– = 100 mV  
CP0+ – CP0– = –100 mV  
CP0+ – CP0– = 100 mV  
CP0+ – CP0– = –100 mV  
CP0+ – CP0– = 100 mV  
CP0+ – CP0– = –100 mV  
CP0+ – CP0– = 100 mV  
CP0+ – CP0– = –100 mV  
Mode 0, Vcm* = 1.5 V  
250  
ns  
175  
ns  
Response Time:  
Mode 1, Vcm* = 1.5 V  
500  
ns  
320  
ns  
Response Time:  
Mode 2, Vcm* = 1.5 V  
1100  
1050  
5200  
ns  
ns  
Response Time:  
Mode 3, Vcm* = 1.5 V  
ns  
Common-Mode Rejection  
Ratio  
1.5  
TBD  
mV/V  
Positive Hysteresis 1  
Positive Hysteresis 2  
Positive Hysteresis 3  
Positive Hysteresis 4  
Negative Hysteresis 1  
Negative Hysteresis 2  
Negative Hysteresis 3  
Negative Hysteresis 4  
CP0HYP1–0 = 00  
CP0HYP1–0 = 01  
CP0HYP1–0 = 10  
CP0HYP1–0 = 11  
CP0HYN1–0 = 00  
CP0HYN1–0 = 01  
CP0HYN1–0 = 10  
CP0HYN1–0 = 11  
0
5
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
mV  
mV  
mV  
mV  
mV  
mV  
mV  
mV  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
10  
20  
0
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
5
10  
20  
VDD  
0.25  
+
Inverting or Non-Inverting  
Input Voltage Range  
–0.25  
V
Input Capacitance  
Input Bias Current  
Input Offset Voltage  
–5  
–5  
7
0.001  
pF  
nA  
TBD  
TBD  
mV  
Power Supply  
Power Supply Rejection  
Powerup Time  
0.1  
10  
TBD  
mV/V  
µs  
Mode 0  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
20  
µA  
8.3  
2.6  
0.5  
µA  
Supply Current at DC  
µA  
µA  
*Note: Vcm is the common-mode voltage on CP0+ and CP0–.  
52  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
8. Voltage Regulator (REG0)  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include an internal voltage regulator (REG0) to regulate the internal core  
supply to 1.8 V from a VDD supply of 1.8 to 3.6 V. Two power-saving modes are built into the regulator to  
help reduce current consumption in low-power applications. These modes are accessed through the  
REG0CN register (SFR Definition 8.1). Electrical characteristics for the on-chip regulator are specified in  
Table 8.1  
If an external regulator is used to power the device, the internal regulator may be put into bypass mode  
using the BYPASS bit. The internal regulator should never be placed in bypass mode unless an  
external 1.8 V regulator is used to supply VDD. Doing so could cause permanent damage to the  
device.  
Under default conditions, when the device enters STOP mode the internal regulator will remain on. This  
allows any enabled reset source to generate a reset for the device and bring the device out of STOP mode.  
For additional power savings, the STOPCF bit can be used to shut down the regulator and the internal  
power network of the device when the part enters STOP mode. When STOPCF is set to ‘1’, the RST pin  
and a full power cycle of the device are the only methods of generating a reset.  
Rev. 0.5  
53  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 8.1. REG0CN: Voltage Regulator Control  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
STOPCF BYPASS  
OTPPCE 00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xC7  
Bit 7  
STOPCF: Stop Mode Configuration.  
This bit configures the regulator’s behavior when the device enters STOP mode.  
0: Regulator is still active in STOP mode. Any enabled reset source will reset the device.  
1: Regulator is shut down in STOP mode. Only the RST pin, Supply Monitor or power cycle  
can reset the device.  
Bit 6  
BYPASS: Bypass Internal Regulator.  
This bit places the regulator in bypass mode, turning off the regulator, and allowing the core  
to run directly from the VDD supply pin.  
0: Normal Mode - Regulator is on.  
1: Bypass Mode - Regulator is off, and the microcontroller core operates directly from the  
VDD supply voltage.  
IMPORTANT: Bypass mode is for use with an external regulator as the supply voltage  
only. Never place the regulator in bypass mode when the VDD supply voltage is  
greater than the specifications given in Table 2.1 on page 23. Doing so may cause  
permanent damage to the device.  
Bits 5–1 RESERVED. Must Always Write 00000b.  
Bit 0  
OTPPCE: OTP Power Controller Enable.  
This bit can help the system save power at slower system clock frequencies (about 2 MHz or  
less) by automatically shutting down the OTP memory between clocks when information is  
not being fetched from the OTP memory.  
0: Normal Mode - OTP power controller disabled (OTP memory is always on).  
1: Low Power Mode - OTP power controller enabled (OTP memory turns on/off as needed).  
Note: If an external clock source is used with the OTP Power Controller enabled, and the  
clock frequency changes from slow (<2 MHz) to fast (>2 MHz), the OTP power will turn on,  
and up to 20 clocks may be "skipped" to ensure that the OTP power is stable before reading  
memory.  
Table 8.1. Internal Voltage Regulator Electrical Characteristics  
–40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Input Voltage Range  
Bias Current  
Conditions  
Min  
1.8  
Typ  
Max  
3.6  
Units  
V
Normal Mode  
TBD  
µA  
54  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9. CIP-51 Microcontroller  
The MCU system controller core is the CIP-51 microcontroller. The CIP-51 is fully compatible with the  
MCS-51™ instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can be used to develop soft-  
ware. The MCU family has a superset of all the peripherals included with a standard 8051. Included are  
three 16-bit counter/timers (see description in Section 16), an enhanced full-duplex UART (see description  
in Section 15), 256 bytes of internal RAM, 128 byte Special Function Register (SFR) address space (Sec-  
tion 9.2.6), and one byte-wide I/O Port (see description in Section 13). The CIP-51 also includes on-chip  
debug hardware (see description in Section 19), and interfaces directly with the analog and digital sub-  
systems providing a complete data acquisition or control-system solution in a single integrated circuit.  
The CIP-51 Microcontroller core implements the standard 8051 organization and peripherals as well as  
additional custom peripherals and functions to extend its capability (see Figure 9.1 for a block diagram).  
The CIP-51 includes the following features:  
- Fully Compatible with MCS-51 Instruction Set  
- 25 MIPS Peak Throughput with 25 MHz Clock  
- 0 to 25 MHz Clock Frequency  
- Extended Interrupt Handler  
- Reset Input  
- Power Management Modes  
- On-chip Debug Logic  
- 256 Bytes of Internal RAM  
- Byte-Wide I/O Port  
- Program and Data Memory Security  
DATA BUS  
ACCUMULATOR  
B
REGISTER  
STACK POINTER  
TMP1  
TMP2  
SRAM  
ADDRESS  
REGISTER  
SRAM  
(256 X 8)  
PSW  
ALU  
DATA BUS  
SFR_ADDRESS  
SFR_CONTROL  
D8  
BUFFER  
SFR  
BUS  
INTERFACE  
D8  
SFR_WRITE_DATA  
SFR_READ_DATA  
D8  
DATA POINTER  
PC INCREMENTER  
D8  
MEM_ADDRESS  
MEM_CONTROL  
PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)  
PRGM. ADDRESS REG.  
PIPELINE  
MEMORY  
INTERFACE  
A16  
D8  
MEM_WRITE_DATA  
MEM_READ_DATA  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
RESET  
CLOCK  
SYSTEM_IRQs  
INTERRUPT  
INTERFACE  
EMULATION_IRQ  
D8  
STOP  
IDLE  
POWER CONTROL  
REGISTER  
D8  
Figure 9.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
55  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Performance  
The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the stan-  
dard 8051 architecture. In a standard 8051, all instructions except for MUL and DIV take 12 or 24 system  
clock cycles to execute, and usually have a maximum system clock of 12 MHz. By contrast, the CIP-51  
core executes 70% of its instructions in one or two system clock cycles, with no instructions taking more  
than eight system clock cycles.  
With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 25 MIPS. The CIP-51 has  
a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instructions for each execution time.  
Clocks to Execute  
Number of Instructions  
1
26  
2
50  
2/3  
5
3
14  
3/4  
7
4
3
4/5  
1
5
2
8
1
Programming and Debugging Support  
In-system programming of the program memory and communication with on-chip debug support logic is  
accomplished via the Silicon Labs 2-Wire Development Interface (C2).  
The on-chip debug support logic facilitates full speed in-circuit debugging, allowing the setting of hardware  
breakpoints, starting, stopping and single stepping through program execution (including interrupt service  
routines), examination of the program's call stack, and reading/writing the contents of registers. This  
method of on-chip debugging is completely non-intrusive, requiring no RAM, Stack, timers, or other on-chip  
resources. C2 details can be found in Section “19. C2 Interface” on page 161.  
The C8051F300 can be used as a code development platform. The C8051F300 utilizes the same pinout,  
and can operate with the same firmware, but contains re-programmable Flash memory, allowing for quick  
development of code.  
The CIP-51 is supported by development tools from Silicon Labs and third party vendors. Silicon Labs pro-  
vides an integrated development environment (IDE) including editor, debugger and programmer. The IDE's  
debugger and programmer interface to the CIP-51 via the C2 interface to provide fast and efficient in-sys-  
tem device programming and debugging. Third party macro assemblers and C compilers are also avail-  
able.  
9.1. Instruction Set  
The instruction set of the CIP-51 System Controller is fully compatible with the standard MCS-51™ instruc-  
tion set. Standard 8051 development tools can be used to develop software for the CIP-51. All CIP-51  
instructions are the binary and functional equivalent of their MCS-51™ counterparts, including opcodes,  
addressing modes and effect on PSW flags. However, instruction timing is different than that of the stan-  
dard 8051.  
9.1.1. Instruction and CPU Timing  
In many 8051 implementations, a distinction is made between machine cycles and clock cycles, with  
machine cycles varying from 2 to 12 clock cycles in length. However, the CIP-51 implementation is based  
solely on clock cycle timing. All instruction timings are specified in terms of clock cycles.  
Due to the pipelined architecture of the CIP-51, most instructions execute in the same number of clock  
cycles as there are program bytes in the instruction. Conditional branch instructions take one less clock  
cycle to complete when the branch is not taken as opposed to when the branch is taken. Table 9.1 is the  
CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary, which includes the mnemonic, number of bytes, and number of clock  
cycles for each instruction.  
56  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 9.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary  
Clock  
Cycles  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
Arithmetic Operations  
ADD A, Rn  
ADD A, direct  
ADD A, @Ri  
ADD A, #data  
ADDC A, Rn  
ADDC A, direct  
ADDC A, @Ri  
ADDC A, #data  
SUBB A, Rn  
SUBB A, direct  
SUBB A, @Ri  
SUBB A, #data  
INC A  
Add register to A  
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
4
8
1
Add direct byte to A  
Add indirect RAM to A  
Add immediate to A  
Add register to A with carry  
Add direct byte to A with carry  
Add indirect RAM to A with carry  
Add immediate to A with carry  
Subtract register from A with borrow  
Subtract direct byte from A with borrow  
Subtract indirect RAM from A with borrow  
Subtract immediate from A with borrow  
Increment A  
INC Rn  
Increment register  
INC direct  
Increment direct byte  
INC @Ri  
Increment indirect RAM  
Decrement A  
DEC A  
DEC Rn  
Decrement register  
DEC direct  
DEC @Ri  
Decrement direct byte  
Decrement indirect RAM  
Increment Data Pointer  
Multiply A and B  
INC DPTR  
MUL AB  
DIV AB  
Divide A by B  
DA A  
Decimal adjust A  
Rev. 0.5  
57  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 9.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Clock  
Cycles  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
Logical Operations  
ANL A, Rn  
AND Register to A  
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
2
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ANL A, direct  
ANL A, @Ri  
AND direct byte to A  
AND indirect RAM to A  
AND immediate to A  
ANL A, #data  
ANL direct, A  
ANL direct, #data  
ORL A, Rn  
AND A to direct byte  
AND immediate to direct byte  
OR Register to A  
ORL A, direct  
ORL A, @Ri  
ORL A, #data  
ORL direct, A  
ORL direct, #data  
XRL A, Rn  
OR direct byte to A  
OR indirect RAM to A  
OR immediate to A  
OR A to direct byte  
OR immediate to direct byte  
Exclusive-OR Register to A  
Exclusive-OR direct byte to A  
Exclusive-OR indirect RAM to A  
Exclusive-OR immediate to A  
Exclusive-OR A to direct byte  
Exclusive-OR immediate to direct byte  
Clear A  
XRL A, direct  
XRL A, @Ri  
XRL A, #data  
XRL direct, A  
XRL direct, #data  
CLR A  
CPL A  
Complement A  
RL A  
Rotate A left  
RLC A  
Rotate A left through Carry  
Rotate A right  
RR A  
RRC A  
Rotate A right through Carry  
Swap nibbles of A  
SWAP A  
Data Transfer  
MOV A, Rn  
Move Register to A  
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
MOV A, direct  
MOV A, @Ri  
MOV A, #data  
MOV Rn, A  
Move direct byte to A  
Move indirect RAM to A  
Move immediate to A  
Move A to Register  
MOV Rn, direct  
MOV Rn, #data  
MOV direct, A  
MOV direct, Rn  
MOV direct, direct  
MOV direct, @Ri  
MOV direct, #data  
MOV @Ri, A  
MOV @Ri, direct  
MOV @Ri, #data  
MOV DPTR, #data16  
MOVC A, @A+DPTR  
MOVC A, @A+PC  
*MOVX A, @Ri  
*MOVX @Ri, A  
Move direct byte to Register  
Move immediate to Register  
Move A to direct byte  
Move Register to direct byte  
Move direct byte to direct byte  
Move indirect RAM to direct byte  
Move immediate to direct byte  
Move A to indirect RAM  
Move direct byte to indirect RAM  
Move immediate to indirect RAM  
Load DPTR with 16-bit constant  
Move code byte relative DPTR to A  
Move code byte relative PC to A  
Move external data (8-bit address) to A  
Move A to external data (8-bit address)  
58  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 9.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Clock  
Cycles  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
*MOVX A, @DPTR  
*MOVX @DPTR, A  
PUSH direct  
POP direct  
Move external data (16-bit address) to A  
Move A to external data (16-bit address)  
Push direct byte onto stack  
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
3
3
2
2
1
2
2
2
Pop direct byte from stack  
XCH A, Rn  
Exchange Register with A  
XCH A, direct  
XCH A, @Ri  
XCHD A, @Ri  
Boolean Manipulation  
CLR C  
Exchange direct byte with A  
Exchange indirect RAM with A  
Exchange low nibble of indirect RAM with A  
Clear Carry  
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
2
CLR bit  
Clear direct bit  
SETB C  
Set Carry  
1
SETB bit  
Set direct bit  
2
CPL C  
Complement Carry  
1
CPL bit  
Complement direct bit  
AND direct bit to Carry  
AND complement of direct bit to Carry  
OR direct bit to carry  
OR complement of direct bit to Carry  
Move direct bit to Carry  
Move Carry to direct bit  
Jump if Carry is set  
2
ANL C, bit  
2
ANL C, /bit  
2
ORL C, bit  
2
ORL C, /bit  
MOV C, bit  
2
2
MOV bit, C  
2
JC rel  
2/3  
2/3  
3/4  
3/4  
3/4  
JNC rel  
Jump if Carry is not set  
Jump if direct bit is set  
Jump if direct bit is not set  
Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit  
JB bit, rel  
JNB bit, rel  
JBC bit, rel  
Program Branching  
ACALL addr11  
LCALL addr16  
RET  
Absolute subroutine call  
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
1
3
4
Long subroutine call  
Return from subroutine  
5
RETI  
Return from interrupt  
5
AJMP addr11  
LJMP addr16  
SJMP rel  
Absolute jump  
3
Long jump  
4
Short jump (relative address)  
Jump indirect relative to DPTR  
Jump if A equals zero  
3
JMP @A+DPTR  
JZ rel  
3
2/3  
2/3  
3/4  
3/4  
3/4  
4/5  
2/3  
3/4  
1
JNZ rel  
Jump if A does not equal zero  
Compare direct byte to A and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate to A and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate to Register and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate to indirect and jump if not equal  
Decrement Register and jump if not zero  
Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero  
No operation  
CJNE A, direct, rel  
CJNE A, #data, rel  
CJNE Rn, #data, rel  
CJNE @Ri, #data, rel  
DJNZ Rn, rel  
DJNZ direct, rel  
NOP  
*Note: MOVX instructions are implemented within the CIP-51 core, though no XRAM space is available on these  
devices.  
Rev. 0.5  
59  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Notes on Registers, Operands and Addressing Modes:  
Rn—Register R0–R7 of the currently selected register bank.  
@Ri—Data RAM location addressed indirectly through R0 or R1.  
rel—8-bit, signed (two’s complement) offset relative to the first byte of the following instruction. Used by  
SJMP and all conditional jumps.  
direct—8-bit internal data location’s address. This could be a direct-access Data RAM location (0x00–  
0x7F) or an SFR (0x80–0xFF).  
#data—8-bit constant  
#data16—16-bit constant  
bit—Direct-accessed bit in Data RAM or SFR  
addr11—11-bit destination address used by ACALL and AJMP. The destination must be within the  
same 2 kB page of program memory as the first byte of the following instruction.  
addr16—16-bit destination address used by LCALL and LJMP. The destination may be anywhere within  
the 8 kB program memory space.  
There is one unused opcode (0xA5) that performs the same function as NOP.  
All mnemonics copyrighted © Intel Corporation 1980.  
60  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.2. Memory Organization  
The memory organization of the CIP-51 System Controller is similar to that of a standard 8051. There are  
two separate memory spaces: program memory and data memory. Program and data memory share the  
same address space but are accessed via different instruction types. The CIP-51 memory organization is  
shown in Figure 9.2 and Figure 9.3.  
9.2.1. Program Memory  
The CIP-51 core has a 64 kB program memory space. The C8051T600/1 implements 8192 bytes of this  
program memory space as in-system, OTP EPROM, organized in a contiguous block from addresses  
0x0000 to 0x1FFF. Note: 512 bytes (0x1E00 – 0x1FFF) of this memory are reserved for factory use and  
are not available for user program storage. The C8051T602/3 implements 4096 bytes of OTP EPROM pro-  
gram memory space; the C8051T604/5 implements 2048 bytes of OTP EPROM program memory space.  
Figure 9.2 shows the program memory maps for C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices.  
C8051T600/1  
C8051T602/3  
C8051T604/5  
0x1FFF  
0x1FFF  
0x1FFE  
0x1FFF  
0x1FFE  
Security Byte  
Security Byte  
Security Byte  
0x1FFE  
0x1E00  
0x1DFF  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0x1000  
0x0FFF  
7680 Bytes  
OTP Memory  
4096 Bytes  
OTP Memory  
0x0800  
0x07FF  
2048 Bytes  
OTP Memory  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
Figure 9.2. Program Memory Maps  
Program memory is read-only from within firmware. Individual program memory bytes can be read using  
the MOVC instruction. This facilitates the use of OTP EPROM space for constant storage.  
Rev. 0.5  
61  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.2.2. Data Memory  
The CIP-51 includes 256 bytes of internal RAM mapped into the data memory space from 0x00 through  
0xFF. The lower 128 bytes of data memory are used for general purpose registers and scratch pad mem-  
ory. Either direct or indirect addressing may be used to access the lower 128 bytes of data memory. Loca-  
tions 0x00 through 0x1F are addressable as four banks of general purpose registers, each bank consisting  
of eight byte-wide registers. The next 16 bytes, locations 0x20 through 0x2F, may either be addressed as  
bytes or as 128 bit locations accessible with the direct addressing mode.  
The upper 128 bytes of data memory are accessible only by indirect addressing. This region occupies the  
same address space as the Special Function Registers (SFR) but is physically separate from the SFR  
space. The addressing mode used by an instruction when accessing locations above 0x7F determines  
whether the CPU accesses the upper 128 bytes of data memory space or the SFRs. Instructions that use  
direct addressing will access the SFR space. Instructions using indirect addressing above 0x7F access the  
upper 128 bytes of data memory. Figure 9.3 illustrates the data memory organization of the CIP-51.  
INTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE  
0xFF  
Upper 128 RAM  
(Indirect Addressing  
Only)  
Special Function  
Register's  
(Direct Addressing Only)  
0x80  
0x7F  
(Direct and Indirect  
Addressing)  
Lower 128 RAM  
(Direct and Indirect  
Addressing)  
0x30  
0x2F  
Bit Addressable  
0x20  
0x1F  
General Purpose  
Registers  
0x00  
Figure 9.3. Data Memory Map  
9.2.3. General Purpose Registers  
The lower 32 bytes of data memory, locations 0x00 through 0x1F, may be addressed as four banks of gen-  
eral-purpose registers. Each bank consists of eight byte-wide registers designated R0 through R7. Only  
one of these banks may be enabled at a time. Two bits in the program status word, RS0 (PSW.3) and RS1  
(PSW.4), select the active register bank (see description of the PSW in Figure 9.4). This allows fast context  
switching when entering subroutines and interrupt service routines. Indirect addressing modes use regis-  
ters R0 and R1 as index registers.  
62  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.2.4. Bit Addressable Locations  
In addition to direct access to data memory organized as bytes, the sixteen data memory locations at 0x20  
through 0x2F are also accessible as 128 individually addressable bits. Each bit has a bit address from  
0x00 to 0x7F. Bit 0 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x00 while bit 7 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address  
0x07. Bit 7 of the byte at 0x2F has bit address 0x7F. A bit access is distinguished from a full byte access by  
the type of instruction used (bit source or destination operands as opposed to a byte source or destina-  
tion).  
The MCS-51™ assembly language allows an alternate notation for bit addressing of the form XX.B where  
XX is the byte address and B is the bit position within the byte. For example, the instruction:  
MOV  
C, 22.3h  
moves the Boolean value at 0x13 (bit 3 of the byte at location 0x22) into the Carry flag.  
9.2.5. Stack  
A programmer's stack can be located anywhere in the 256-byte data memory. The stack area is desig-  
nated using the Stack Pointer (SP, 0x81) SFR. The SP will point to the last location used. The next value  
pushed on the stack is placed at SP+1 and then SP is incremented. A reset initializes the stack pointer to  
location 0x07. Therefore, the first value pushed on the stack is placed at location 0x08, which is also the  
first register (R0) of register bank 1. Thus, if more than one register bank is to be used, the SP should be  
initialized to a location in the data memory not being used for data storage. The stack depth can extend up  
to 256 bytes.  
9.2.6. Special Function Registers  
The direct-access data memory locations from 0x80 to 0xFF constitute the special function registers  
(SFRs). The SFRs provide control and data exchange with the CIP-51's resources and peripherals. The  
CIP-51 duplicates the SFRs found in a typical 8051 implementation as well as implementing additional  
SFRs used to configure and access the sub-systems unique to the MCU. This allows the addition of new  
functionality while retaining compatibility with the MCS-51™ instruction set. Table 9.2 lists the SFRs imple-  
mented in the CIP-51 System Controller.  
The SFR registers are accessed anytime the direct addressing mode is used to access memory locations  
from 0x80 to 0xFF. SFRs with addresses ending in 0x0 or 0x8 (e.g. P0, TCON, SCON0, IE, etc.) are bit-  
addressable as well as byte-addressable. All other SFRs are byte-addressable only. Unoccupied  
addresses in the SFR space are reserved for future use. Accessing these areas will have an indeterminate  
effect and should be avoided. Refer to the corresponding pages of the data sheet, as indicated in  
Table 9.3, for a detailed description of each register.  
Rev. 0.5  
63  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 9.2. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map  
F8 CPT0CN  
F0  
PCA0L  
PCA0H PCA0CPL0 PCA0CPH0  
B
P0MDIN  
EIP1  
EIE1  
E8 ADC0CN PCA0CPL1 PCA0CPH1 PCA0CPL2 PCA0CPH2  
E0 ACC XBR0 XBR1 XBR2 IT01CF  
D8 PCA0CN PCA0MD PCA0CPM0 PCA0CPM1 PCA0CPM2  
D0 PSW REF0CN  
C8 TMR2CN  
C0 SMB0CN SMB0CF SMB0DAT ADC0GTL ADC0GTH ADC0LTL ADC0LTH REG0CN  
RSTSRC  
TMR2RLL TMR2RLH  
TMR2L  
TMR2H  
B8  
B0  
A8  
A0  
IP  
AMX0SL  
OSCICL  
ADC0CF  
ADC0L  
ADC0H  
OSCXCN  
SBUF0  
OSCICN  
TOFFL  
IE  
TOFFH  
P0MDOUT  
98 SCON0  
90  
CPT0MD  
TH1  
CPT0MX  
88  
80  
TCON  
P0  
TMOD  
SP  
TL0  
DPL  
2(A)  
TL1  
DPH  
3(B)  
TH0  
4(C)  
CKCON  
6(E)  
PCON  
7(F)  
0(8)  
1(9)  
5(D)  
(bit addressable)  
64  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 9.3. Special Function Registers  
SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved  
Register  
ACC  
Address  
0xE0  
0xBC  
0xE8  
0xC4  
0xC3  
0xC6  
0xC5  
0xBE  
0xBD  
0xBB  
0xF0  
0x8E  
0xF8  
0x9D  
0x9F  
0x83  
0x82  
0xE6  
0xF6  
0xA8  
0xB8  
0xE4  
0xB3  
0xB2  
0xB1  
0x80  
0xF1  
0xA4  
0xD8  
0xD9  
0xFC  
0xEA  
0xEC  
0xFB  
0xE9  
0xEB  
0xDA  
0xDB  
Description  
Page #  
69  
Accumulator  
ADC0CF  
ADC0CN  
ADC0GTH  
ADC0GTL  
ADC0LTH  
ADC0LTL  
ADC0H  
ADC0L  
ADC0 Configuration  
40  
ADC0 Control  
41  
ADC0 Greater-Than Compare High Byte  
ADC0 Greater-Than Compare Low Byte  
ADC0 Less-Than Compare High Byte  
ADC0 Less-Than Compare Low Byte  
ADC0 Data Word High Byte  
ADC0 Data Word Low Byte  
ADC0 Multiplexer Channel Select  
B Register  
43  
43  
43  
43  
40  
40  
AMX0SL  
B
39  
69  
CKCON  
CPT0CN  
CPT0MD  
CPT0MX  
DPH  
Clock Control  
137  
49  
Comparator0 Control  
Comparator0 Mode Selection  
Comparator0 MUX Selection  
Data Pointer High  
51  
50  
67  
DPL  
Data Pointer Low  
67  
EIE1  
Extended Interrupt Enable 1  
External Interrupt Priority 1  
Interrupt Enable  
75  
EIP1  
76  
IE  
73  
IP  
Interrupt Priority  
74  
IT01CF  
INT0/INT1 Configuration Register  
Internal Oscillator Calibration  
Internal Oscillator Control  
External Oscillator Control  
Port 0 Latch  
77  
OSCICL  
OSCICN  
OSCXCN  
P0  
92  
92  
94  
103  
103  
103  
154  
155  
158  
158  
158  
158  
158  
158  
156  
156  
P0MDIN  
P0MDOUT  
PCA0CN  
PCA0MD  
PCA0CPH0  
PCA0CPH1  
PCA0CPH2  
PCA0CPL0  
PCA0CPL1  
PCA0CPL2  
PCA0CPM0  
PCA0CPM1  
Port 0 Input Mode Configuration  
Port 0 Output Mode Configuration  
PCA Control  
PCA Mode  
PCA Capture 0 High  
PCA Capture 1 High  
PCA Capture 2 High  
PCA Capture 0 Low  
PCA Capture 1 Low  
PCA Capture 2 Low  
PCA Module 0 Mode Register  
PCA Module 1 Mode Register  
Rev. 0.5  
65  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 9.3. Special Function Registers (Continued)  
SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved  
Register  
PCA0CPM2  
PCA0H  
PCA0L  
PCON  
Address  
0xDC  
0xFA  
0xF9  
0x87  
0xD0  
0xD1  
0xC7  
0xEF  
0x99  
0x98  
0xC1  
0xC0  
0xC2  
0x81  
0xC8  
0x88  
0x8C  
0x8D  
0x8A  
0x8B  
0x89  
0xCB  
0xCA  
0xCD  
0xCC  
0xA3  
0xA2  
0xE1  
0xE2  
0xE3  
Description  
Page #  
156  
157  
157  
79  
PCA Module 2 Mode Register  
PCA Counter High  
PCA Counter Low  
Power Control  
PSW  
Program Status Word  
Voltage Reference Control  
Voltage Regulator Control  
Reset Source Configuration/Status  
UART 0 Data Buffer  
68  
REF0CN  
REG0CN  
RSTSRC  
SBUF0  
SCON0  
SMB0CF  
SMB0CN  
SMB0DAT  
SP  
46  
54  
85  
129  
128  
112  
114  
116  
67  
UART 0 Control  
SMBus Configuration  
SMBus Control  
SMBus Data  
Stack Pointer  
TMR2CN  
TCON  
Timer/Counter 2 Control  
Timer/Counter Control  
Timer/Counter 0 High  
Timer/Counter 1 High  
Timer/Counter 0 Low  
Timer/Counter 1 Low  
Timer/Counter Mode  
141  
135  
138  
138  
138  
138  
136  
142  
142  
142  
142  
34  
TH0  
TH1  
TL0  
TL1  
TMOD  
TMR2RLH  
TMR2RLL  
TMR2H  
TMR2L  
TOFFH  
TOFFL  
XBR0  
Timer/Counter 2 Reload High  
Timer/Counter 2 Reload Low  
Timer/Counter 2 High  
Timer/Counter 2 Low  
Temperature Sensor Offset Measurement High  
Temperature Sensor Offset Measurement Low  
Port I/O Crossbar Control 0  
Port I/O Crossbar Control 1  
Port I/O Crossbar Control 2  
Reserved  
35  
100  
101  
102  
XBR1  
XBR2  
All other SFR locations  
66  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.2.7. Register Descriptions  
Following are descriptions of SFRs related to the operation of the CIP-51 System Controller. Reserved bits  
should only be set to the value indicated in the register description. Future product versions may use these  
bits to implement new features in which case the reset value of the bit will select the feature's default state.  
Detailed descriptions of the remaining SFRs are included in the sections of the data sheet associated with  
their corresponding system function.  
SFR Definition 9.1. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x82  
Bits7–0: DPL: Data Pointer Low.  
The DPL register is the low byte of the 16-bit DPTR.  
SFR Definition 9.2. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x83  
Bits7–0: DPH: Data Pointer High.  
The DPH register is the high byte of the 16-bit DPTR.  
SFR Definition 9.3. SP: Stack Pointer  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000111  
SFR Address:  
0x81  
Bits7–0: SP: Stack Pointer.  
The Stack Pointer holds the location of the top of the stack. The stack pointer is incremented  
before every PUSH operation. The SP register defaults to 0x07 after reset.  
Rev. 0.5  
67  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 9.4. PSW: Program Status Word  
R/W  
CY  
Bit7  
R/W  
AC  
Bit6  
R/W  
F0  
R/W  
RS1  
Bit4  
R/W  
RS0  
Bit3  
R/W  
OV  
Bit2  
R/W  
F1  
R
Reset Value  
PARITY 00000000  
Bit5  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
(bit addressable)  
0xD0  
Bit7:  
CY: Carry Flag.  
This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry (addition) or a borrow  
(subtraction). It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic operations.  
AC: Auxiliary Carry Flag  
Bit6:  
This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry into (addition) or a borrow  
from (subtraction) the high order nibble. It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic opera-  
tions.  
Bit5:  
F0: User Flag 0.  
This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control.  
Bits4–3: RS1-RS0: Register Bank Select.  
These bits select which register bank is used during register accesses.  
RS1  
RS0  
Register Bank  
Address  
0x00–0x07  
0x08–0x0F  
0x10–0x17  
0x18–0x1F  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
Bit2:  
OV: Overflow Flag.  
The OV flag is set to 1 under the following circumstances:  
- An ADD, ADDC, or SUBB instruction causes a sign-change overflow.  
- A MUL instruction results in an overflow (result is greater than 255).  
- A DIV instruction causes a divide-by-zero condition.  
The OV flag is cleared to 0 by the ADD, ADDC, SUBB, MUL, and DIV instructions in all other  
cases.  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
F1: User Flag 1.  
This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control.  
PARITY: Parity Flag.  
This bit is set to logic 1 if the sum of the eight bits in the accumulator is odd and cleared if the  
sum is even.  
68  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 9.5. ACC: Accumulator  
R/W  
ACC.7  
Bit7  
R/W  
ACC.6  
Bit6  
R/W  
ACC.5  
Bit5  
R/W  
ACC.4  
Bit4  
R/W  
ACC.3  
Bit3  
R/W  
ACC.2  
Bit2  
R/W  
ACC.1  
Bit1  
R/W  
Reset Value  
ACC.0 00000000  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
(bit addressable)  
0xE0  
Bits7–0: ACC: Accumulator.  
This register is the accumulator for arithmetic operations.  
SFR Definition 9.6. B: B Register  
R/W  
B.7  
Bit7  
R/W  
B.6  
Bit6  
R/W  
B.5  
Bit5  
R/W  
B.4  
Bit4  
R/W  
B.3  
Bit3  
R/W  
B.2  
Bit2  
R/W  
B.1  
Bit1  
R/W  
B.0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xF0  
Bit0  
(bit addressable)  
Bits7–0: B: B Register.  
This register serves as a second accumulator for certain arithmetic operations.  
Rev. 0.5  
69  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.3. Interrupt Handler  
The CIP-51 includes an extended interrupt system supporting a total of 12 interrupt sources with two prior-  
ity levels. The allocation of interrupt sources between on-chip peripherals and external inputs pins varies  
according to the specific version of the device. Each interrupt source has one or more associated interrupt-  
pending flag(s) located in an SFR. When a peripheral or external source meets a valid interrupt condition,  
the associated interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1.  
If interrupts are enabled for the source, an interrupt request is generated when the interrupt-pending flag is  
set. As soon as execution of the current instruction is complete, the CPU generates an LCALL to a prede-  
termined address to begin execution of an interrupt service routine (ISR). Each ISR must end with an RETI  
instruction, which returns program execution to the next instruction that would have been executed if the  
interrupt request had not occurred. If interrupts are not enabled, the interrupt-pending flag is ignored by the  
hardware and program execution continues as normal. (The interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1 regard-  
less of the interrupt's enable/disable state.)  
Each interrupt source can be individually enabled or disabled through the use of an associated interrupt  
enable bit in an SFR (IE–EIE1). However, interrupts must first be globally enabled by setting the EA bit  
(IE.7) to logic 1 before the individual interrupt enables are recognized. Setting the EA bit to logic 0 disables  
all interrupt sources regardless of the individual interrupt-enable settings.  
Note: Any instruction that clears the EA bit should be immediately followed by an instruction that has two  
or more opcode bytes. For example:  
// in 'C':  
EA = 0;  
EA = 0;  
// clear EA bit  
// ... followed by another 2-byte opcode  
; in assembly:  
CLR EA  
CLR EA  
; clear EA bit  
; ... followed by another 2-byte opcode  
If an interrupt is posted during the execution phase of a "CLR EA" opcode (or any instruction which clears  
the EA bit), and the instruction is followed by a single-cycle instruction, the interrupt may be taken. How-  
ever, a read of the EA bit will return a '0' inside the interrupt service routine. When the "CLR EA" opcode is  
followed by a multi-cycle instruction, the interrupt will not be taken.  
Some interrupt-pending flags are automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR.  
However, most are not cleared by the hardware and must be cleared by software before returning from the  
ISR. If an interrupt-pending flag remains set after the CPU completes the return-from-interrupt (RETI)  
instruction, a new interrupt request will be generated immediately and the CPU will re-enter the ISR after  
the completion of the next instruction.  
70  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.3.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors  
The MCUs support 12 interrupt sources. Software can simulate an interrupt by setting any interrupt-pend-  
ing flag to logic 1. If interrupts are enabled for the flag, an interrupt request will be generated and the CPU  
will vector to the ISR address associated with the interrupt-pending flag. MCU interrupt sources, associ-  
ated vector addresses, priority order and control bits are summarized in Table 9.4 on page 72. Refer to the  
data sheet section associated with a particular on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt  
conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its interrupt-pending flag(s).  
9.3.2. External Interrupts  
The /INT0 and /INT1 external interrupt sources are configurable as active high or low, edge or level sensi-  
tive. The IN0PL (/INT0 Polarity) and IN1PL (/INT1 Polarity) bits in the IT01CF register select active high or  
active low; the IT0 and IT1 bits in TCON (Section “16.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1” on page 131) select level  
or edge sensitive. The table below lists the possible configurations.  
IT0  
1
1
0
0
IN0PL  
/INT0 Interrupt  
IT1  
1
1
0
0
IN1PL  
/INT1 Interrupt  
0
1
0
1
Active low, edge sensitive  
Active high, edge sensitive  
Active low, level sensitive  
Active high, level sensitive  
0
1
0
1
Active low, edge sensitive  
Active high, edge sensitive  
Active low, level sensitive  
Active high, level sensitive  
/INT0 and /INT1 are assigned to Port pins as defined in the IT01CF register (see SFR Definition 9.11).  
Note that /INT0 and /INT1 Port pin assignments are independent of any Crossbar assignments. /INT0 and  
/INT1 will monitor their assigned Port pins without disturbing the peripheral that was assigned the Port pin  
via the Crossbar. To assign a Port pin only to /INT0 and/or /INT1, configure the Crossbar to skip the  
selected pin(s). This is accomplished by setting the associated bit in register XBR0 (see Section  
“13.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 98 for complete details on configuring the Crossbar).  
IE0 (TCON.1) and IE1 (TCON.3) serve as the interrupt-pending flags for the /INT0 and /INT1 external  
interrupts, respectively. If an /INT0 or /INT1 external interrupt is configured as edge-sensitive, the corre-  
sponding interrupt-pending flag is automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR.  
When configured as level sensitive, the interrupt-pending flag remains logic 1 while the input is active as  
defined by the corresponding polarity bit (IN0PL or IN1PL); the flag remains logic 0 while the input is inac-  
tive. The external interrupt source must hold the input active until the interrupt request is recognized. It  
must then deactivate the interrupt request before execution of the ISR completes or another interrupt  
request will be generated.  
9.3.3. Interrupt Priorities  
Each interrupt source can be individually programmed to one of two priority levels: low or high. A low prior-  
ity interrupt service routine can be preempted by a high priority interrupt. A high priority interrupt cannot be  
preempted. Each interrupt has an associated interrupt priority bit in an SFR (IP or EIP1) used to configure  
its priority level. Low priority is the default. If two interrupts are recognized simultaneously, the interrupt with  
the higher priority is serviced first. If both interrupts have the same priority level, a fixed priority order is  
used to arbitrate, given in Table 9.4.  
Rev. 0.5  
71  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.3.4. Interrupt Latency  
Interrupt response time depends on the state of the CPU when the interrupt occurs. Pending interrupts are  
sampled and priority decoded each system clock cycle. Therefore, the fastest possible response time is 5  
system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt and 4 clock cycles to complete the LCALL to the  
ISR. If an interrupt is pending when a RETI is executed, a single instruction is executed before an LCALL  
is made to service the pending interrupt. Therefore, the maximum response time for an interrupt (when no  
other interrupt is currently being serviced or the new interrupt is of greater priority) occurs when the CPU is  
performing an RETI instruction followed by a DIV as the next instruction. In this case, the response time is  
18 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt, 5 clock cycles to execute the RETI, 8 clock  
cycles to complete the DIV instruction and 4 clock cycles to execute the LCALL to the ISR. If the CPU is  
executing an ISR for an interrupt with equal or higher priority, the new interrupt will not be serviced until the  
current ISR completes, including the RETI and following instruction.  
Table 9.4. Interrupt Summary  
Interrupt Priority  
Enable  
Flag  
Priority  
Control  
Interrupt Source  
Pending Flag  
Vector  
Order  
Always  
Enabled  
Always  
Highest  
Reset  
0x0000  
Top  
None  
N/A N/A  
External Interrupt 0 (/INT0) 0x0003  
Timer 0 Overflow 0x000B  
External Interrupt 1 (/INT1) 0x0013  
0
1
2
3
IE0 (TCON.1)  
TF0 (TCON.5)  
IE1 (TCON.3)  
TF1 (TCON.7)  
RI0 (SCON0.0)  
TI0 (SCON0.1)  
TF2H  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
EX0 (IE.0) PX0 (IP.0)  
ET0 (IE.1) PT0 (IP.1)  
EX1 (IE.2) PX1 (IP.2)  
ET1 (IE.3) PT1 (IP.3)  
Timer 1 Overflow  
0x001B  
UART0  
0x0023  
4
Y
N
ES0 (IE.4) PS0 (IP.4)  
(TMR2CN.7)  
TF2L  
Timer 2 Overflow  
0x002B  
5
Y
N
ET2 (IE.5) PT2 (IP.5)  
(TMR2CN.6)  
ESMB0  
(EIE1.0)  
EWADC0 PWADC0  
(EIE1.1) (EIP1.1)  
EADC0C PADC0C  
PSMB0  
(EIP1.0)  
SMBus Interface  
0x0033  
0x003B  
0x0043  
6
7
8
SI (SMB0CN.0)  
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
AD0WINT  
(ADC0CN.3)  
AD0INT  
(ADC0CN.5)  
CF (PCA0CN.7)  
CCFn  
ADC0 Window Compare  
ADC0 Conversion  
Complete  
(EIE1.2)  
(EIP1.2)  
Programmable Counter  
Array  
EPCA0  
(EIE1.3)  
PPCA0  
(EIP1.3)  
0x004B  
9
Y
N
(PCA0CN.n)  
CP0FIF  
(CPT0CN.4)  
CP0RIF  
ECP0F  
(EIE1.4)  
ECP0R  
(EIE1.5)  
PCP0F  
(EIP1.4)  
PCP0R  
(EIP1.5)  
Comparator0 Falling Edge  
Comparator0 Rising Edge  
0x0053  
0x005B  
10  
11  
N
N
N
N
(CPT0CN.5)  
72  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.3.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions  
The SFRs used to enable the interrupt sources and set their priority level are described below. Refer to the  
data sheet section associated with a particular on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt  
conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its interrupt-pending flag(s).  
SFR Definition 9.7. IE: Interrupt Enable  
R/W  
EA  
Bit7  
R/W  
IEGF0  
Bit6  
R/W  
ET2  
Bit5  
R/W  
ES0  
Bit4  
R/W  
ET1  
Bit3  
R/W  
EX1  
Bit2  
R/W  
ET0  
Bit1  
R/W  
EX0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xA8  
Bit0  
(bit addressable)  
Bit7:  
EA: Enable All Interrupts.  
This bit globally enables/disables all interrupts. It overrides the individual interrupt mask set-  
tings.  
0: Disable all interrupt sources.  
1: Enable each interrupt according to its individual mask setting.  
IEGF0: General Purpose Flag 0.  
This is a general purpose flag for use under software control.  
ET2: Enable Timer 2 Interrupt.  
Bit6:  
Bit5:  
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 2 interrupt.  
0: Disable Timer 2 interrupt.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF2L or TF2H flags.  
ES0: Enable UART0 Interrupt.  
This bit sets the masking of the UART0 interrupt.  
0: Disable UART0 interrupt.  
1: Enable UART0 interrupt.  
ET1: Enable Timer 1 Interrupt.  
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 1 interrupt.  
0: Disable all Timer 1 interrupt.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF1 flag.  
EX1: Enable External Interrupt 1.  
This bit sets the masking of external interrupt 1.  
0: Disable external interrupt 1.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the /INT1 input.  
ET0: Enable Timer 0 Interrupt.  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 0 interrupt.  
0: Disable all Timer 0 interrupt.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF0 flag.  
EX0: Enable External Interrupt 0.  
This bit sets the masking of external interrupt 0.  
0: Disable external interrupt 0.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the /INT0 input.  
Rev. 0.5  
73  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 9.8. IP: Interrupt Priority  
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
PT2  
Bit5  
R/W  
PS0  
Bit4  
R/W  
PT1  
Bit3  
R/W  
PX1  
Bit2  
R/W  
PT0  
Bit1  
R/W  
PX0  
Reset Value  
11000000  
SFR Address:  
0xB8  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit0  
(bit addressable)  
Bits7–6: UNUSED. Read = 11b, Write = don't care.  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
PT2: Timer 2 Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 2 interrupt.  
0: Timer 2 interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: Timer 2 interrupt set to high priority level.  
PS0: UART0 Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the UART0 interrupt.  
0: UART0 interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: UART0 interrupt set to high priority level.  
PT1: Timer 1 Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 1 interrupt.  
0: Timer 1 interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: Timer 1 interrupt set to high priority level.  
PX1: External Interrupt 1 Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 1 interrupt.  
0: External Interrupt 1 set to low priority level.  
1: External Interrupt 1 set to high priority level.  
PT0: Timer 0 Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 0 interrupt.  
0: Timer 0 interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: Timer 0 interrupt set to high priority level.  
PX0: External Interrupt 0 Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 0 interrupt.  
0: External Interrupt 0 set to low priority level.  
1: External Interrupt 0 set to high priority level.  
74  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 9.9. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1  
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
ECP0R  
Bit5  
R/W  
ECP0F  
Bit4  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
EPCA0 EADC0C EWADC0 ESMB0 00000000  
Bit3  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xE6  
Bits7–6: UNUSED. Read = 00b. Write = don’t care.  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
ECP0R: Enable Comparator0 (CP0) Rising Edge Interrupt.  
This bit sets the masking of the CP0 Rising Edge interrupt.  
0: Disable CP0 Rising Edge interrupt.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP0RIF flag.  
ECP0F: Enable Comparator0 (CP0) Falling Edge Interrupt.  
This bit sets the masking of the CP0 Falling Edge interrupt.  
0: Disable CP0 Falling Edge interrupt.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP0FIF flag.  
EPCA0: Enable Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt.  
This bit sets the masking of the PCA0 interrupts.  
0: Disable all PCA0 interrupts.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by PCA0.  
EADC0C: Enable ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt.  
This bit sets the masking of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.  
0: Disable ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the AD0INT flag.  
EWADC0: Enable Window Comparison ADC0 Interrupt.  
This bit sets the masking of ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt.  
0: Disable ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by ADC0 Window Compare flag.  
ESMB0: Enable SMBus Interrupt.  
This bit sets the masking of the SMBus interrupt.  
0: Disable all SMBus interrupts.  
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the SI flag.  
Rev. 0.5  
75  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 9.10. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1  
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
PCP0R  
Bit5  
R/W  
PCP0F  
Bit4  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
PPCA0 PADC0C PWADC0 PSMB0 11000000  
Bit3  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xF6  
Bits7–6: UNUSED. Read = 11b. Write = don’t care.  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
PCP0R: Comparator0 (CP0) Rising Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the CP0 rising-edge interrupt.  
0: CP0 rising interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: CP0 rising interrupt set to high priority level.  
PCP0F: Comparator0 (CP0) Falling Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the CP0 falling-edge interrupt.  
0: CP0 falling interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: CP0 falling interrupt set to high priority level.  
PPCA0: Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the PCA0 interrupt.  
0: PCA0 interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: PCA0 interrupt set to high priority level.  
PADC0C ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Priority Control  
This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.  
0: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to high priority level.  
PWADC0: ADC0 Window Comparator Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Window interrupt.  
0: ADC0 Window interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: ADC0 Window interrupt set to high priority level.  
PSMB0: SMBus Interrupt Priority Control.  
This bit sets the priority of the SMBus interrupt.  
0: SMBus interrupt set to low priority level.  
1: SMBus interrupt set to high priority level.  
76  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 9.11. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 Configuration  
R/W  
IN1PL  
Bit7  
R/W  
IN1SL2  
Bit6  
R/W  
IN1SL1  
Bit5  
R/W  
IN1SL0  
Bit4  
R/W  
IN0PL  
Bit3  
R/W  
IN0SL2  
Bit2  
R/W  
IN0SL1  
Bit1  
R/W  
Reset Value  
IN0SL0 00000001  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xE4  
Note: Refer to SFR Definition 16.1 for INT0/1 edge- or level-sensitive interrupt selection.  
Bit7:  
IN1PL: /INT1 Polarity  
0: /INT1 input is active low.  
1: /INT1 input is active high.  
Bits6–4: IN1SL2–0: /INT1 Port Pin Selection Bits  
These bits select which Port pin is assigned to /INT1. Note that this pin assignment is inde-  
pendent of the Crossbar; /INT1 will monitor the assigned Port pin without disturbing the  
peripheral that has been assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not  
assign the Port pin to a peripheral if it is configured to skip the selected pin (accomplished by  
setting to ‘1’ the corresponding bit in register XBR0).  
IN1SL2–0  
000  
/INT1 Port Pin  
P0.0  
001  
P0.1  
010  
P0.2  
011  
P0.3  
100  
P0.4  
101  
P0.5  
110  
P0.6  
111  
P0.7  
Bit3:  
IN0PL: /INT0 Polarity  
0: /INT0 interrupt is active low.  
1: /INT0 interrupt is active high.  
Bits2–0: INT0SL2–0: /INT0 Port Pin Selection Bits  
These bits select which Port pin is assigned to /INT0. Note that this pin assignment is inde-  
pendent of the Crossbar. /INT0 will monitor the assigned Port pin without disturbing the  
peripheral that has been assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not  
assign the Port pin to a peripheral if it is configured to skip the selected pin (accomplished by  
setting to ‘1’ the corresponding bit in register XBR0).  
IN0SL2–0  
000  
/INT0 Port Pin  
P0.0  
001  
P0.1  
010  
P0.2  
011  
P0.3  
100  
P0.4  
101  
P0.5  
110  
P0.6  
111  
P0.7  
Rev. 0.5  
77  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.4. Power Management Modes  
The CIP-51 core has two software programmable power management modes: Idle and Stop. Idle mode  
halts the CPU while leaving the peripherals and clocks active. In Stop mode, the CPU is halted, all inter-  
rupts and timers (except the Missing Clock Detector) are inactive, and the system clock is stopped (analog  
peripherals remain in their selected states). Since clocks are running in Idle mode, power consumption is  
dependent upon the system clock frequency and the number of peripherals left in active mode before  
entering Idle. Stop mode consumes the least power. SFR Definition 9.12 describes the Power Control Reg-  
ister (PCON) used to control the CIP-51's power management modes.  
Although the CIP-51 has Idle and Stop modes built in (as with any standard 8051 architecture), power  
management of the entire MCU is better accomplished by enabling/disabling individual peripherals as  
needed. Each analog peripheral can be disabled when not in use and placed in low power mode. Digital  
peripherals, such as timers or serial buses, draw little power when they are not in use. Turning off the oscil-  
lators lowers power consumption considerably; however a reset is required to restart the MCU.  
9.4.1. Idle Mode  
Setting the Idle Mode Select bit (PCON.0) causes the CIP-51 to halt the CPU and enter Idle mode as soon  
as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. All internal registers and memory maintain their  
original data. All analog and digital peripherals can remain active during Idle mode.  
Idle mode is terminated when an enabled interrupt is asserted or a reset occurs. The assertion of an  
enabled interrupt will cause the Idle Mode Selection bit (PCON.0) to be cleared and the CPU to resume  
operation. The pending interrupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the return  
from interrupt (RETI) will be the instruction immediately following the one that set the Idle Mode Select bit.  
If Idle mode is terminated by an internal or external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence  
and begins program execution at address 0x0000.  
If enabled, the Watchdog Timer (WDT) will eventually cause an internal watchdog reset and thereby termi-  
nate the Idle mode. This feature protects the system from an unintended permanent shutdown in the event  
of an inadvertent write to the PCON register. If this behavior is not desired, the WDT may be disabled by  
software prior to entering the Idle mode if the WDT was initially configured to allow this operation. This pro-  
vides the opportunity for additional power savings, allowing the system to remain in the Idle mode indefi-  
nitely, waiting for an external stimulus to wake up the system. Refer to Section “17.3. Watchdog Timer  
Mode” on page 151 for more information on the use and configuration of the WDT.  
Note: Any instruction that sets the IDLE bit should be immediately followed by an instruction that has 2 or  
more opcode bytes. For example:  
// in 'C':  
PCON |= 0x01;  
PCON = PCON;  
// set IDLE bit  
// ... followed by a 3-cycle dummy instruction  
; in assembly:  
ORL PCON, #01h  
MOV PCON, PCON  
; set IDLE bit  
; ... followed by a 3-cycle dummy instruction  
If the instruction following the write of the IDLE bit is a single-byte instruction and an interrupt occurs during  
the execution phase of the instruction that sets the IDLE bit, the CPU may not wake from IDLE mode when  
a future interrupt occurs.  
78  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
9.4.2. Stop Mode  
Setting the Stop Mode Select bit (PCON.1) causes the CIP-51 to enter Stop mode as soon as the instruc-  
tion that sets the bit completes execution. In Stop mode the internal oscillator, CPU, and all digital periph-  
erals are stopped; the state of the external oscillator circuit is not affected. Each analog peripheral  
(including the external oscillator circuit) may be shut down individually prior to entering Stop Mode. Stop  
mode can only be terminated by an internal or external reset. On reset, the CIP-51 performs the normal  
reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000.  
If enabled, the Missing Clock Detector will cause an internal reset and thereby terminate the Stop mode.  
The Missing Clock Detector should be disabled if the CPU is to be put to in STOP mode for longer than the  
MCD timeout.  
By default, when in Stop Mode the internal regulator is still active. However, the regulator can be config-  
ured to shut down while in Stop Mode to save power. To shut down the regulator in Stop Mode, the  
STOPCF bit in register REG0CN should be set to ‘1’ prior to setting the STOP bit (see SFR Definition 8.1).  
If the regulator is shut down using the STOPCF bit, only the RST pin or a full power cycle are capable of  
resetting the device.  
Note: It is important to follow the instruction to enter Stop mode with one that does not access any SFRs or  
RAM (such as a NOP). This will prevent additional supply current in Stop mode.  
SFR Definition 9.12. PCON: Power Control  
R/W  
GF5  
Bit7  
R/W  
GF4  
Bit6  
R/W  
GF3  
Bit5  
R/W  
GF2  
Bit4  
R/W  
GF1  
Bit3  
R/W  
GF0  
Bit2  
R/W  
STOP  
Bit1  
R/W  
IDLE  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x87  
Bits7–2: GF5–GF0: General Purpose Flags 5–0.  
These are general purpose flags for use under software control.  
STOP: Stop Mode Select.  
Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Stop mode. This bit will always be read as 0.  
1: CPU goes into Stop mode (turns off internal oscillator).  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
IDLE: Idle Mode Select.  
Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Idle mode. This bit will always be read as 0.  
1: CPU goes into Idle mode (shuts off clock to CPU, but clock to Timers, Interrupts, Serial  
Ports, and Analog Peripherals are still active).  
Rev. 0.5  
79  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
NOTES:  
80  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
10. Reset Sources  
Reset circuitry allows the controller to be easily placed in a predefined default condition. On entry to this  
reset state, the following occur:  
CIP-51 halts program execution  
Special Function Registers (SFRs) are initialized to their defined reset values  
External Port pins are forced to a known state  
Interrupts and timers are disabled.  
All SFRs are reset to the predefined values noted in the SFR detailed descriptions. The contents of internal  
data memory are unaffected during a reset; any previously stored data is preserved. However, since the  
stack pointer SFR is reset, the stack is effectively lost even though the data on the stack is not altered.  
The Port I/O latches are reset to 0xFF (all logic ones) in open-drain mode. Weak pullups are enabled dur-  
ing and after the reset. For VDD Monitor and power-on resets, the RST pin is driven low until the device  
exits the reset state.  
On exit from the reset state, the program counter (PC) is reset, and the system clock defaults to the inter-  
nal oscillator. Refer to Section “12. Oscillators” on page 91 for information on selecting and configuring  
the system clock source. The Watchdog Timer is enabled with the system clock divided by 12 as its clock  
source (Section “17.3. Watchdog Timer Mode” on page 151 details the use of the Watchdog Timer).  
Once the system clock source is stable, program execution begins at location 0x0000.  
Supply  
Monitor  
'0'  
/RST  
Power On  
Reset  
Comparator 0  
(wired-OR)  
P0.x  
P0.y  
+
-
C0RSEF  
Missing  
Clock  
Detector  
(one-  
shot)  
Reset  
Funnel  
PCA  
WDT  
(Software Reset)  
EN  
SWRSF  
Illegal OTP  
operation  
EN  
Internal  
Oscillator  
System  
Clock  
External  
Clock  
CIP-51  
Microcontroller  
Core  
EXTCLK  
System Reset  
Clock Select  
Source  
Extended Interrupt  
Handler  
Figure 10.1. Reset Sources  
Rev. 0.5  
81  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
10.1. Power-On Reset  
During power-up, the device is held in a reset state and the RST pin is driven low. An additional delay  
occurs before the device is released from reset; the delay decreases as the VDD ramp time increases (VDD  
ramp time is defined as how fast VDD ramps from 0 V to 1.8 V). Figure 10.2. plots the power-on and VDD  
monitor reset timing. For valid ramp times (less than 1 ms), the power-on reset delay (TPORDelay) is typi-  
cally less than 0.3 ms. The maximum VDD ramp time is 1 ms; slower ramp times may cause the device to  
be released from reset before VDD reaches the VRST level. If the VDD ramp time in an application will  
exceed 1 ms, external circuitry should be used to hold RST low until the VDD supply is within the valid sup-  
ply range for the device.  
On exit from a power-on reset, the PORSF flag (RSTSRC.1) is set by hardware to logic 1. When PORSF is  
set, all of the other reset flags in the RSTSRC Register are indeterminate (PORSF is cleared by all other  
resets). Since all resets cause program execution to begin at the same location (0x0000) software can  
read the PORSF flag to determine if a power-up was the cause of reset. The content of internal data mem-  
ory is undefined after a power-on reset. The VDD monitor is disabled following a power-on reset.  
VDD  
TBD  
TBD  
VRST  
TBD  
TBD  
t
/RST  
Logic HIGH  
TPORDelay  
Logic LOW  
VDD  
Power-On  
Reset  
Monitor  
Reset  
Figure 10.2. Power-On and V Monitor Reset Timing  
DD  
82  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
10.2. Power-Fail Reset/V Monitor  
DD  
If the power supply monitor is enabled, when a power-down transition or power irregularity causes VDD to  
drop below VRST, the power supply monitor will drive the RST pin low and hold the CIP-51 in a reset state  
(see Figure 10.2). When VDD returns to a level above VRST, the CIP-51 will be released from the reset  
state. Note that even though internal data memory contents are not altered by the power-fail reset, it is  
impossible to determine if VDD dropped below the level required for data retention. If the PORSF flag reads  
‘1’, the data may no longer be valid. The VDD monitor is disabled after power-on resets; however its  
defined state (enabled/disabled) is not altered by any other reset source. For example, if the VDD monitor  
is enabled and a software reset is performed, the VDD monitor will still be enabled after the reset. The VDD  
monitor is enabled by writing a ‘1’ to the PORSF bit in register RSTSRC. See Figure 10.2 for VDD monitor  
timing; note that the reset delay is not incurred after a VDD monitor reset. See Table 10.2 for electrical char-  
acteristics of the VDD monitor.  
Important Note: Enabling the VDD monitor when it is not already enabled will immediately generate a sys-  
tem reset. The device will then return from the reset state with the VDD monitor enabled. Writing a logic  
‘1’ to the PORSF flag when the VDD monitor is already enabled does not cause a system reset.  
10.3. External Reset  
The external RST pin provides a means for external circuitry to force the device into a reset state. Assert-  
ing an active-low signal on the RST pin generates a reset; an external pullup and/or decoupling of the RST  
pin may be necessary to avoid erroneous noise-induced resets. See Table 10.2 for complete RST pin  
specifications. The PINRSF flag (RSTSRC.0) is set on exit from an external reset.  
10.4. Missing Clock Detector Reset  
The Missing Clock Detector (MCD) is a one-shot circuit that is triggered by the system clock. If the system  
clock remains high or low for more than 100 µs, the one-shot will time out and generate a reset. After a  
MCD reset, the MCDRSF flag (RSTSRC.2) will read ‘1’, signifying the MCD as the reset source; otherwise,  
this bit reads ‘0’. Writing a ‘1’ to the MCDRSF bit enables the Missing Clock Detector; writing a ‘0’ disables  
it. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by a missing clock detector reset.  
10.5. Comparator0 Reset  
Comparator0 can be configured as a reset source by writing a ‘1’ to the C0RSEF flag (RSTSRC.5).  
Comparator0 should be enabled and allowed to settle prior to writing to C0RSEF to prevent any turn-on  
chatter on the output from generating an unwanted reset. The Comparator0 reset is active-low: if the non-  
inverting input voltage (on CP0+) is less than the inverting input voltage (on CP0–), the device is put into  
the reset state. After a Comparator0 reset, the C0RSEF flag (RSTSRC.5) will read ‘1’ signifying  
Comparator0 as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads ‘0’. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by a  
Comparator0 reset.  
10.6. PCA Watchdog Timer Reset  
The programmable Watchdog Timer (WDT) function of the Programmable Counter Array (PCA) can be  
used to prevent software from running out of control during a system malfunction. The PCA WDT function  
can be enabled or disabled by software as described in Section “17.3. Watchdog Timer Mode” on  
page 151; the WDT is enabled and clocked by SYSCLK / 12 following any reset. If a system malfunction  
prevents user software from updating the WDT, a reset is generated and the WDTRSF bit (RSTSRC.5) is  
set to ‘1’. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by a WDT reset.  
Rev. 0.5  
83  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
10.7. OTP Error Reset  
If an OTP program read or a write procedure targets an illegal address, a system reset is generated. This  
may occur due to any of the following:  
Programming hardware attempts to write or read an OTP location which is above the user code space  
address limit.  
An OTP read from firmware is attempted above user code space. This occurs when a MOVC operation  
is attempted above the user code space address limit.  
A Program read is attempted above user code space. This occurs when user code attempts to branch  
to an address above the user code space address limit.  
Table 10.1. User Code Space Address Limits  
Device  
User Code Space Address Limit  
C8051T600/1  
C8051T602/3  
C8051T604/5  
0x1DFF  
0x0FFF  
0x07FF  
The OTPERR bit (RSTSRC.6) is set following any OTP error reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected  
by an OTP error reset.  
10.8. Software Reset  
Software may force a reset by writing a ‘1’ to the SWRSF bit (RSTSRC.4). The SWRSF bit will read ‘1’ fol-  
lowing a software forced reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by a software reset.  
84  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 10.1. RSTSRC: Reset Source  
R
-
R
R/W  
R/W  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R
Reset Value  
OTPERR C0RSEF SWRSF WDTRSF MCDRSF PORSF PINRSF Variable  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xEF  
Note: For bits that act as both reset source enables (on a write) and reset indicator flags (on a read), read-  
modify-write instructions read and modify the source enable only.  
Bit7:  
Bit6:  
UNUSED. Read = 0. Write = don’t care.  
OTPERR: OTP Error Indicator.  
0: Source of last reset was not an OTP read error.  
1: Source of last reset was an OTP read error.  
C0RSEF: Comparator0 Reset Enable and Flag.  
Write  
0: Comparator0 is not a reset source.  
1: Comparator0 is a reset source (active-low).  
Read  
0: Source of last reset was not Comparator0.  
1: Source of last reset was Comparator0.  
SWRSF: Software Reset Force and Flag.  
Write  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
0: No Effect.  
1: Forces a system reset.  
Read  
0: Source of last reset was not a write to the SWRSF bit.  
1: Source of last was a write to the SWRSF bit.  
WDTRSF: Watchdog Timer Reset Flag.  
0: Source of last reset was not a WDT timeout.  
1: Source of last reset was a WDT timeout.  
MCDRSF: Missing Clock Detector Flag.  
Write:  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
0: Missing Clock Detector disabled.  
1: Missing Clock Detector enabled; triggers a reset if a missing clock condition is detected.  
Read:  
0: Source of last reset was not a Missing Clock Detector timeout.  
1: Source of last reset was a Missing Clock Detector timeout.  
PORSF: Power-On Reset Force and Flag.  
This bit is set anytime a power-on reset occurs. This may be due to a true power-on reset or a  
Bit1:  
V
monitor reset. In either case, data memory should be considered indeterminate following  
DD  
the reset. Writing this bit enables/disables the V monitor.  
DD  
Write:  
0: V monitor disabled.  
DD  
1: V monitor enabled.  
DD  
Read:  
0: Last reset was not a power-on or V monitor reset.  
DD  
1: Last reset was a power-on or V monitor reset; all other reset flags indeterminate.  
DD  
Bit0:  
PINRSF: HW Pin Reset Flag.  
0: Source of last reset was not RST pin.  
1: Source of last reset was RST pin.  
Rev. 0.5  
85  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 10.2. Reset Electrical Characteristics  
–40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
IOL = 8.5 mA,  
RST Output Low Voltage  
0.6  
V
V
VDD = 1.8 to 3.6 V  
0.7 x VDD  
RST Input High Voltage  
RST Input Low Voltage  
RST Input Leakage Current  
0.3 x VDD  
RST = 0.0 V  
25  
40  
1
µA  
ms  
V
V
DD Ramp Time for POR  
Ramp from 0 to 1.8 V  
VDD Monitor Threshold (VRST  
)
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
Time from last system clock  
rising edge to reset initiation  
Missing Clock Detector Timeout  
Reset Time Delay  
300  
450  
600  
60  
µs  
µs  
µs  
Delay between release of any  
reset source and code execu-  
tion at location 0x0000  
Minimum RST Low Time to  
Generate a System Reset  
15  
86  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
11. One-Time Programmable Read-Only Memory  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include 8 kB (C8051T600/1), 4 kB (C8051T602/3), or 2 kB (C8051T604/5) of  
on-chip One Time Programmable (OTP) EPROM for program code storage. The EPROM memory can be  
programmed via the C2 debug and programming interface when a special programming voltage is applied  
to the VPP pin. Table 11.1 shows the EPROM specifications.  
Table 11.1. EPROM Electrical Characteristics  
Parameter  
OTP EPROM Size  
Conditions  
C8051T600/1  
Min  
8192*  
4096  
2048  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Bytes  
Bytes  
Bytes  
µs  
OTP EPROM Size  
C8051T602/3  
C8051T604/5  
OTP EPROM Size  
Write Cycle Time (per Byte)  
100  
6.5  
Programming Voltage (VPP  
)
6.25  
6.75  
V
*Note: 512 bytes at location 0x1E00 to 0x1FFF are not available for program storage  
11.1. Programming the EPROM Memory  
Programming of the OTP EPROM memory is accomplished through the C2 programming and debug inter-  
face. When creating hardware to program the EPROM, it is necessary to follow the programming steps  
listed below. Please refer to the “C2 Interface Specification” available at http://www.silabs.com for details  
on communicating via the C2 interface. Section “19. C2 Interface” on page 161 has information about  
C2 register addresses for the C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5.  
1. Reset the device using the /RST pin.  
2. Wait at least 20 µs before sending the first C2 command.  
3. Place the device in core reset: Write 0x04 to the DEVCTL register.  
4. Set the device to program mode (1st step): Write 0x40 to the EPCTL register.  
5. Set the device to program mode (2nd step): Write 0x58 to the EPCTL register.  
6. Apply the VPP programming Voltage.  
7. Write the first EPROM address for programming to EPADDRH and EPADDRL.  
8. Write a data byte to EPDAT. EPADDRH:L will increment by 1 after this write.  
9. Poll the OTPBusy bit using a C2 Address Read command. Note: If OTPError is set at this  
time, the write operation failed.  
10. If programming is not finished, return to Step 8 to write the next address in sequence, or return  
to Step 7 to program a new address.  
11. Remove program mode (1st step): Write 0x40 to the EPCTL register.  
12. Remove the VPP programming Voltage.  
13. Remove program mode (2nd step): Write 0x00 to the EPCTL register.  
14. Reset the device: Write 0x02 and then 0x00 to the DEVCTL register.  
Important Note: There is a finite amount of time which VPP can be applied without damaging the  
device, which is cumulative over the life of the device. Refer to Table 2.1 on page 23 for the VPP tim-  
ing specification.  
Rev. 0.5  
87  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
11.2. Security Options  
The C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices provide security options to prevent unauthorized viewing of proprietary  
program code and constants. A security byte stored at location 0x1FFF in EPROM address space can be  
used to lock the program memory from being read or written across the C2 interface. The lock byte can  
always be read regardless of the security settings. Table 11.2 shows the security byte decoding. See  
Figure 11.1 for the program memory map and security byte locations for each device.  
Important Note: Once the security byte has been written, there are no means of unlocking the  
device. Locking memory from write access should be performed only after all other code has been  
successfully programmed to memory.  
Table 11.2. Security Byte Decoding  
Bits  
Description  
Write Lock: Clearing any of these bits to logic 0 prevents all code  
memory from being written across the C2 interface.  
Read Lock: Clearing any of these bits to logic 0 prevents all code  
memory from being read across the C2 interface.  
7–4  
3–0  
C8051T600/1  
C8051T602/3  
C8051T604/5  
0x1FFF  
0x1FFF  
0x1FFE  
0x1FFF  
0x1FFE  
Security Byte  
Security Byte  
Security Byte  
0x1FFE  
0x1E00  
0x1DFF  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0x1000  
0x0FFF  
7680 Bytes  
OTP Memory  
4096 Bytes  
OTP Memory  
0x0800  
0x07FF  
2048 Bytes  
OTP Memory  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
Figure 11.1. OTP EPROM Program Memory Map  
88  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
11.3. Program Memory CRC  
A CRC engine is included on-chip which provides a means of verifying EPROM contents once the device  
has been programmed. The CRC engine is available for EPROM verification even if the device is fully read  
and write locked, allowing for verification of code contents at any time.  
The CRC engine is operated through the C2 debug and programming interface, and performs 16-bit CRCs  
on individual 256-Byte blocks of program memory, or a 32-bit CRC the entire memory space. To prevent  
hacking and extrapolation of security-locked source code, the CRC engine will only allow CRCs to be per-  
formed on contiguous 256-Byte blocks beginning on 256-Byte boundaries (lowest 8-bits of address are  
0x00). For example, the CRC engine can perform a CRC for locations 0x0400 through 0x04FF, but it can-  
not perform a CRC for locations 0x0401 through 0x0500, or on block sizes smaller or larger than 256  
Bytes.  
11.3.1. Performing 32-bit CRCs on Full EPROM Content  
A 32-bit CRC on the enter EPROM space is initiated by writing to the CRC1 byte over the C2 interface.  
The CRC calculation begins at address 0x0000, and ends at the end of user EPROM space. The OTP-  
Busy bit in register C2ADD will be set during the CRC operation, and cleared once the operation is com-  
plete. The 32-bit results will be available in the CRC3-0 registers. CRC3 is the MSB, and CRC0 is the LSB.  
The polynomial used for the 32-bit CRC calculation is 0x04C11DB7. Note: If a 16-bit CRC has been per-  
formed since the last device reset, a device reset should be initiated before performing a 32-bit CRC oper-  
ation.  
11.3.2. Performing 16-bit CRCs on 256-Byte EPROM Blocks  
A 16-bit CRC of individual 256-byte blocks of EPROM can be initiated by writing to the CRC0 byte over the  
C2 interface. The value written to CRC0 is the high byte of the beginning address for the CRC. For exam-  
ple, if CRC0 is written to 0x02, the CRC will be performed on the 256-bytes beginning at address 0x0200,  
and ending at address 0x2FF. The OTPBusy bit in register C2ADD will be set during the CRC operation,  
and cleared once the operation is complete. The 16-bit results will be available in the CRC1-0 registers.  
CRC1 is the MSB, and CRC0 is the LSB. The polynomial for the 16-bit CRC calculation is 0x1021.  
Rev. 0.5  
89  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
NOTES:  
90  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
12. Oscillators  
All C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include a calibrated, precision internal oscillator and an external clock  
input circuit. The external clock input circuitry can be configured to operate from a CMOS clock, an exter-  
nal capacitor, or an external RC circuit. The internal oscillator can be enabled/disabled and adjusted using  
the OSCICN and OSCICL registers, as shown in Figure 12.1. The system clock can be sourced by the  
external clock input circuit, the internal oscillator, or a scaled version of the internal oscillator. The internal  
oscillator's electrical specifications are given in Table 12.1 on page 92.  
OSCICL  
OSCICN  
EN  
Internal Clock  
Generator  
n
SYSCLK  
Option 1  
EXTCLK  
Input  
Circuit  
OSC  
EXTCLK  
Option 2  
EXTCLK  
Option 3  
VDD  
EXTCLK  
OSCXCN  
Figure 12.1. Oscillator Diagram  
12.1. Calibrated Internal Oscillator  
All C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include a calibrated internal oscillator that defaults as the system clock  
after a system reset. The oscillator is factory calibrated to obtain a 24.5 MHz frequency at room tempera-  
ture, using the OSCICL register.  
The controller’s core clock (SYSCLK) may be derived from the 24.5 MHz internal oscillator divided by 1, 2,  
4, or 8, as defined by the IFCN bits in register OSCICN. The divide value defaults to 8 following a reset,  
producing a 3.0625 MHz system clock.  
Rev. 0.5  
91  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 12.1. OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration  
R/W  
-
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
Variable  
SFR Address:  
0xB3  
Bit7  
Bit7:  
UNUSED. Read = 0. Write = don’t care.  
Bits6–0: OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration Register.  
This register adjusts the internal oscillator period. The reset value for OSCICL defines the  
internal oscillator base frequency. The reset value of this register is factory calibrated to gen-  
erate an internal oscillator frequency of 24.5 MHz.  
SFR Definition 12.2. OSCICN: Internal Oscillator Control  
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
IFCN1  
Bit1  
R/W  
Reset Value  
IFRDY  
Bit4  
CLKSL IOSCEN  
Bit3  
IFCN0 00010100  
Bit0  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit2  
SFR Address:  
0xB2  
Bits7–5: UNUSED. Read = 000b, Write = don't care.  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
IFRDY: Internal Oscillator Frequency Ready Flag.  
0: Internal Oscillator is not running at programmed frequency.  
1: Internal Oscillator is running at programmed frequency.  
CLKSL: System Clock Source Select Bit.  
0: SYSCLK derived from the Internal Oscillator, and scaled as per the IFCN bits.  
1: SYSCLK derived from the External Clock circuit.  
IOSCEN: Internal Oscillator Enable Bit.  
0: Internal Oscillator Disabled.  
1: Internal Oscillator Enabled.  
Bits1–0: IFCN1–0: Internal Oscillator Frequency Control Bits.  
00: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 8.  
01: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 4.  
10: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 2.  
11: SYSCLK derived from Internal Oscillator divided by 1.  
Table 12.1. Internal Oscillator Electrical Characteristics  
–40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.  
Parameter  
Calibrated Internal Oscillator  
Frequency  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max Units  
TBD  
24.5  
TBD  
MHz  
µA  
Internal Oscillator Supply Current  
OSCICN.2 = 1  
TBD  
(from VDD  
)
92  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
12.2. External Oscillator Circuit  
The external oscillator circuit can accept an external CMOS clock, or operate from an external capacitor or  
RC circuit applied to the EXTCLK pin (P0.3). To operate in external CMOS mode, the EXTCLK pin should  
be configured as a digital input. For capacitor or RC mode, the EXTCLK pin should be configured as an  
analog input. See Section “13.2. Port I/O Initialization” on page 99 for details on Port input mode selec-  
tion. Whenever an external clock option is used, the Port I/O Crossbar should be configured to skip the  
EXTCLK pin. See Section “13.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 98 for Crossbar configuration  
details. Note that the external oscillator control settings should not be changed while running the processor  
from an external oscillator source.  
12.3. System Clock Selection  
The CLKSL bit in register OSCICN selects which oscillator is used as the system clock. CLKSL must be  
set to ‘1’ for the system clock to run from an external clock source; however, the external clock may still  
clock peripherals (timers, PCA) when the internal oscillator is selected as the system clock. The system  
clock may be switched on-the-fly between the internal and external clock sources, so long as the selected  
oscillator is enabled and has settled. The internal oscillator requires very little start-up time and may be  
enabled and selected as the system clock in the same write to OSCICN. When switching between internal  
and external clock sources, the hand-off to the other clock source lasts two clock cycles of the slower  
clock.  
Rev. 0.5  
93  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 12.3. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control  
R
-
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
-
R/W  
XFCN2  
Bit2  
R/W  
XFCN1  
Bit1  
R/W  
Reset Value  
XOSCMD2 XOSCMD1 XOSCMD0  
XFCN0 00000000  
Bit0  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
SFR Address:  
0xB1  
Bit7:  
Unused. Read = 0, Write = don’t care.  
Bits6–4: XOSCMD2–0: External Oscillator Mode Bits.  
00x: External Oscillator circuit off.  
010: External CMOS Clock Mode.  
011: External CMOS Clock Mode with divide by 2 stage.  
100 RC Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage.  
101: Capacitor Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage.  
11x: Reserved.  
Bit3:  
Unused. Read = 0, Write = don't care.  
Bits2–0: XFCN2–0: External Oscillator Frequency Control Bits.  
000–111: See table below:  
XFCN  
K Factor  
Approximate Frequency Range  
(Capacitor Mode)  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
0.87  
2.6  
7.7  
22  
65  
180  
664  
1590  
f < 25 kHz  
25 kHz < f < 50 kHz  
50 kHz < f < 100 kHz  
100 kHz < f < 200 kHz  
200 kHz < f < 400 kHz  
400 kHz < f < 800 kHz  
800 kHz < f < 1.6 MHz  
1.6 MHz < f < 3.2 MHz  
Capacitor Mode (Circuit from Figure 12.1, Option 2, XOSCMD = 101)  
Choose K Factor (KF) matching the oscillation frequency desired:  
KF  
C × VDD  
--------------------  
f =  
where  
f = frequency of oscillation in MHz  
C = capacitor value on the EXTCLK pin in pF  
DD = Power Supply on MCU in volts  
V
RC Mode (Circuit from Figure 12.1, Option 3, XOSCMD = 100)  
Choose XFCN value to match desired frequency range:  
1.23 × 1023  
---------------------------  
f =  
R × C  
where  
f = frequency of oscillation in MHz  
C = capacitor value on the EXTCLK pin in pF  
R = pullup resistor value in kΩ  
94  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
12.4. External Capacitor Example  
If a capacitor is used as an external oscillator for the MCU, the circuit should be configured as shown in  
Figure 12.1, Option 2. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however, for very small capacitors,  
the total capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. To determine the  
required External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, select the capaci-  
tor to be used and find the frequency of oscillation from the equations below. Assume VDD = 3.0 V and f =  
150 kHz:  
KF  
C × VDD  
---------------------  
f =  
KF  
C × 3.0  
-----------------  
0.150 MHz =  
Since a frequency of roughly 150 kHz is desired, select the K Factor from SFR Definition 12.3 as KF = 22:  
22  
C × 3.0 V  
-----------------------  
0.150 MHz =  
22  
----------------------------------------------  
C =  
0.150 MHz × 3.0 V  
C = 48.8 pF  
Therefore, the XFCN value to use in this example is 011b and C is approximately 50 pF.  
12.5. External RC Example  
If an RC network is used as an external oscillator source for the MCU, the circuit should be configured as  
shown in Figure 12.1, Option 3. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however for very small  
capacitors, the total capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. To deter-  
mine the required External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, first  
select the RC network value to produce the desired frequency of oscillation. If the frequency desired is  
100 kHz, let R = 246 k and C = 50 pF:  
1.23 × 103  
1.23 × 103  
------------------------  
------------------------  
= 100 kHz  
f =  
=
R × C  
246 × 50  
Referencing the table in SFR Definition 12.3, the required XFCN setting is 010b.  
Rev. 0.5  
95  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
NOTES:  
96  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
13. Port Input/Output  
Digital and analog resources are available through a byte-wide digital I/O Port, Port0. Each of the Port pins  
can be defined as general-purpose I/O (GPIO), analog input, or assigned to one of the internal digital  
resources as shown in Figure 13.3. The designer has complete control over which functions are assigned,  
limited only by the number of physical I/O pins. This resource assignment flexibility is achieved through the  
use of a Priority Crossbar Decoder. The state of a Port I/O pin can always be read in the corresponding  
Port latch, regardless of the Crossbar settings.  
The Crossbar assigns the selected internal digital resources to the I/O pins based on the Priority Decoder  
(Figure 13.3 and Figure 13.4). The registers XBR0, XBR1, and XBR2, defined in SFR Definition 13.1, SFR  
Definition 13.2, and SFR Definition 13.3 are used to select internal digital functions.  
All Port I/Os are 5 V tolerant (refer to Figure 13.2 for the Port cell circuit). The Port I/O cells are configured  
as either push-pull or open-drain in the Port0 Output Mode register (P0MDOUT). Complete Electrical  
Specifications for Port I/O are given in Table 13.1 on page 104.  
XBR0, XBR1,  
P0MDOUT,  
XBR2 Registers  
P0MDIN Registers  
Priority  
Decoder  
2
2
2
Highest  
Priority  
UART  
Digital  
Crossbar  
SMBus  
CP0  
Outputs  
P0.0  
P0.7  
P0  
I/O  
Cells  
8
SYSCLK  
4
2
PCA  
T0, T1  
8
Lowest  
Priority  
Port Latch  
P0  
(P0.0-P0.7)  
Figure 13.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram  
/WEAK-PULLUP  
VDD  
VDD  
PUSH-PULL  
/PORT-OUTENABLE  
(WEAK)  
PORT  
PAD  
PORT-OUTPUT  
GND  
Analog Select  
ANALOG INPUT  
PORT-INPUT  
Figure 13.2. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
97  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
13.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder  
The Priority Crossbar Decoder (Figure 13.3) assigns a priority to each I/O function, starting at the top with  
UART0. When a digital resource is selected, the least-significant unassigned Port pin is assigned to that  
resource (excluding UART0, which is always at pins 4 and 5). If a Port pin is assigned, the Crossbar skips  
that pin when assigning the next selected resource. Additionally, the Crossbar will skip Port pins whose  
associated bits in the XBR0 register are set. The XBR0 register allows software to skip Port pins that are to  
be used for analog input or GPIO.  
Important Note on Crossbar Configuration: If a Port pin is claimed by a peripheral without use of the  
Crossbar, its corresponding XBR0 bit should be set. This applies to P0.0 if VREF is enabled, P0.3 if the  
external oscillator circuit is enabled, P0.6 if the ADC is configured to use the external conversion start sig-  
nal (CNVSTR), and any selected ADC or Comparator inputs. The Crossbar skips selected pins as if they  
were already assigned, and moves to the next unassigned pin. Figure 13.3 shows the Crossbar Decoder  
priority with no Port pins skipped (XBR0 = 0x00); Figure 13.4 shows the Crossbar Decoder priority with  
pins 6 and 2 skipped (XBR0 = 0x44).  
P0  
SF Signals  
PIN I/O  
VREF  
0
EXTCLK  
3
CNVSTR  
6 7  
1
2
4
5
TX0  
RX0  
SDA  
SCL  
CP0  
CP0A  
SYSCLK  
CEX0  
CEX1  
CEX2  
ECI  
T0  
T1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
XBR0[0:7]  
Port pin potentially available to peripheral  
SF Signals  
Special Function Signals are not assigned by the crossbar.  
When these signals are enabled, the CrossBar must be  
manually configured to skip their corresponding port pins.  
Figure 13.3. Crossbar Priority Decoder with XBR0 = 0x00  
98  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
P0  
SF Signals  
PIN I/O  
VREF  
0
EXTCLK  
3
CNVSTR  
6 7  
1
2
4
5
TX0  
RX0  
SDA  
SCL  
CP0  
CP0A  
SYSCLK  
CEX0  
CEX1  
CEX2  
ECI  
T0  
T1  
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
XBR0[0:7]  
Port pin potentially available to peripheral  
Port pin skipped by CrossBar  
SF Signals  
Special Function Signals are not assigned by the crossbar. When  
these signals are enabled, the CrossBar must be manually  
configured to skip their corresponding port pins.  
Figure 13.4. Crossbar Priority Decoder with XBR0 = 0x44  
Registers XBR1 and XBR2 are used to assign the digital I/O resources to the physical I/O Port pins. Note  
that when the SMBus is selected, the Crossbar assigns both pins associated with the SMBus (SDA and  
SCL). Either or both of the UART signals may be selected by the Crossbar. UART0 pin assignments are  
fixed for bootloading purposes: when UART TX0 is selected, it is always assigned to P0.4; when UART  
RX0 is selected, it is always assigned to P0.5. Standard Port I/Os appear contiguously after the prioritized  
functions have been assigned. For example, if assigned functions that take the first 3 Port I/O (P0.[2:0]), 5  
Port I/O are left for analog or GPIO use.  
13.2. Port I/O Initialization  
Port I/O initialization consists of the following steps:  
Step 1. Select the input mode (analog or digital) for all Port pins, using the Port0 Input Mode  
register (P0MDIN).  
Step 2. Select the output mode (open-drain or push-pull) for all Port pins, using the Port0 Output  
Mode register (P0MDOUT).  
Step 3. Set XBR0 to skip any pins selected as analog inputs or special functions.  
Step 4. Assign Port pins to desired peripherals.  
Step 5. Enable the Crossbar.  
Rev. 0.5  
99  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
All Port pins must be configured as either analog or digital inputs. Any pins to be used as Comparator or  
ADC inputs should be configured as an analog inputs. When a pin is configured as an analog input, its  
weak pull-up, digital driver, and digital receiver is disabled. This process saves power and reduces noise  
on the analog input. Pins configured as digital inputs may still be used by analog peripherals; however this  
practice is not recommended.  
Additionally, all analog input pins should be configured to be skipped by the Crossbar (accomplished by  
setting the associated bits in XBR0). Port input mode is set in the P0MDIN register, where a ‘1’ indicates a  
digital input, and a ‘0’ indicates an analog input. All pins default to digital inputs on reset. See SFR Defini-  
tion 13.5 for the P0MDIN register details.  
The output driver characteristics of the I/O pins are defined using the Port0 Output Mode register  
P0MDOUT (see SFR Definition 13.6). Each Port Output driver can be configured as either open drain or  
push-pull. This selection is required even for the digital resources selected in the XBRn registers, and is  
not automatic. The only exception to this is the SMBus (SDA, SCL) pins, which are configured as open-  
drain regardless of the P0MDOUT settings. When the WEAKPUD bit in XBR2 is ‘0’, a weak pull-up is  
enabled for all Port I/O configured as open-drain. WEAKPUD does not affect the push-pull Port I/O. Fur-  
thermore, the weak pull-up is turned off on an open-drain output that is driving a ‘0’ to avoid unnecessary  
power dissipation.  
Registers XBR0, XBR1 and XBR2 must be loaded with the appropriate values to select the digital I/O func-  
tions required by the design. Setting the XBARE bit in XBR2 to ‘1’ enables the Crossbar. Until the Crossbar  
is enabled, the external pins remain as standard digital inputs (output drivers disabled) regardless of the  
XBRn Register settings. For given XBRn Register settings, one can determine the I/O pin-out using the  
Priority Decode Table; as an alternative, the Configuration Wizard utility of the Silicon Labs IDE software  
will determine the Port I/O pin-assignments based on the XBRn Register settings.  
SFR Definition 13.1. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0  
R/W  
-
R/W  
XSKP6  
Bit6  
R/W  
XSKP5  
Bit5  
R/W  
XSKP4  
Bit4  
R/W  
XSKP3  
Bit3  
R/W  
XSKP2  
Bit2  
R/W  
XSKP1  
Bit1  
R/W  
Reset Value  
XSKP0 00000000  
Bit0  
Bit7  
SFR Address:  
0xE1  
Bit7:  
UNUSED. Read = 0b; Write = don’t care.  
Bits6–0: XSKP[6:0]: Crossbar Skip Enable Bits  
These bits select Port pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used as ana-  
log inputs (for ADC or Comparator) or used as special functions (VREF input, external oscil-  
lator circuit, CNVSTR input) should be skipped by the Crossbar.  
0: Corresponding P0.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar.  
1: Corresponding P0.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar.  
100  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 13.2. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1  
R/W  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
PCA0ME  
Bit7  
CP0AOEN CP0OEN SYSCKE SMB0OEN URX0EN UTX0EN 00000000  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xE2  
Bits7–6: PCA0ME: PCA Module I/0 Enable Bits  
00: All PCA I/O unavailable at Port pins.  
01: CEX0 routed to Port pin.  
10: CEX0, CEX1 routed to Port pins.  
11: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2 routed to Port pins.  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
CP0AOEN: Comparator0 Asynchronous Output Enable  
0: Asynchronous CP0 unavailable at Port pin.  
1: Asynchronous CP0 routed to Port pin.  
CP0OEN: Comparator0 Output Enable  
0: CP0 unavailable at Port pin.  
1: CP0 routed to Port pin.  
SYSCKE: /SYSCLK Output Enable  
0: /SYSCLK unavailable at Port pin.  
1: /SYSCLK output routed to Port pin.  
SMB0OEN: SMBus I/O Enable  
0: SMBus I/O unavailable at Port pins.  
1: SDA, SCL routed to Port pins.  
URX0EN: UART RX Enable  
0: UART RX0 unavailable at Port pin.  
1: UART RX0 routed to Port pin P0.5.  
UTX0EN: UART TX Output Enable  
0: UART TX0 unavailable at Port pin.  
1: UART TX0 routed to Port pin P0.4.  
Rev. 0.5  
101  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 13.3. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
-
R/W  
T1E  
Bit2  
R/W  
T0E  
Bit1  
R/W  
ECIE  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xE3  
WEAKPUD XBARE  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit7:  
Bit6:  
WEAKPUD: Port I/O Weak Pull-up Disable.  
0: Weak Pull-ups enabled (except for Ports whose I/O are configured as push-pull).  
1: Weak Pull-ups disabled.  
XBARE: Crossbar Enable.  
0: Crossbar disabled.  
1: Crossbar enabled.  
Bits5–3: UNUSED: Read=000b. Write = don’t care.  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
T1E: T1 Enable.  
0: T1 unavailable at Port pin.  
1: T1 routed to Port pin.  
T0E: T0 Enable.  
0: T0 unavailable at Port pin.  
1: T0 routed to Port pin.  
ECIE: PCA0 Counter Input Enable.  
0: ECI unavailable at Port pin.  
1: ECI routed to Port pin.  
13.3. General Purpose Port I/O  
Port pins that remain unassigned by the Crossbar and are not used by analog peripherals can be used for  
general purpose I/O. Port0 is accessed through a corresponding special function register (SFR) that is  
both byte addressable and bit addressable. When writing to a Port, the value written to the SFR is latched  
to maintain the output data value at each pin. When reading, the logic levels of the Port's input pins are  
returned regardless of the XBRn settings (i.e., even when the pin is assigned to another signal by the  
Crossbar, the Port register can always read its corresponding Port I/O pin). The exception to this is the  
execution of the read-modify-write instructions. The read-modify-write instructions when operating on a  
Port SFR are the following: ANL, ORL, XRL, JBC, CPL, INC, DEC, DJNZ and MOV, CLR or SET, when the  
destination is an individual bit in a Port SFR. For these instructions, the value of the register (not the pin) is  
read, modified, and written back to the SFR.  
102  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 13.4. P0: Port0  
R/W  
P0.7  
Bit7  
R/W  
P0.6  
Bit6  
R/W  
P0.5  
Bit5  
R/W  
P0.4  
Bit4  
R/W  
P0.3  
Bit3  
R/W  
P0.2  
Bit2  
R/W  
P0.1  
Bit1  
R/W  
P0.0  
Reset Value  
11111111  
SFR Address:  
0x80  
Bit0  
(bit addressable)  
Bits7–0: P0.[7:0]  
Write - Output appears on I/O pins per XBR0, XBR1, and XBR2 Registers  
0: Logic Low Output.  
1: Logic High Output (open-drain if corresponding P0MDOUT.n bit = 0)  
Read - Always reads ‘1’ if selected as analog input in register P0MDIN. Directly reads Port  
pin when configured as digital input.  
0: P0.n pin is logic low.  
1: P0.n pin is logic high.  
SFR Definition 13.5. P0MDIN: Port0 Input Mode  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
11111111  
SFR Address:  
0xF1  
Bits7–0: Input Configuration Bits for P0.7–P0.0 (respectively)  
Port pins configured as analog inputs have their weak pull-up, digital driver, and digital  
receiver disabled.  
0: Corresponding P0.n pin is configured as an analog input.  
1: Corresponding P0.n pin is configured as a digital input.  
SFR Definition 13.6. P0MDOUT: Port0 Output Mode  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xA4  
Bits7–0: Output Configuration Bits for P0.7–P0.0 (respectively): ignored if corresponding bit in regis-  
ter P0MDIN is logic 0.  
0: Corresponding P0.n Output is open-drain.  
1: Corresponding P0.n Output is push-pull.  
(Note: When SDA and SCL appear on any of the Port I/O, each are open-drain regardless  
of the value of P0MDOUT).  
Rev. 0.5  
103  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 13.1. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics  
VDD = 1.8 to 3.6 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified.  
Parameters  
Conditions  
IOH = –3 mA, Port I/O push-pull  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
0.8 x VDD  
IOH = –10 µA, Port I/O push-pull  
Output High Voltage  
VDD – 0.1  
V
0.7 x VDD  
IOH = –10 mA, Port I/O push-pull  
IOL = 8.5 mA  
IOL = 10 µA  
0.6  
0.1  
Output Low Voltage  
V
0.4 x VDD  
IOL = 25 mA  
0.7 x VDD  
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
25  
V
V
0.3 x VDD  
Weak Pull-up Off  
±1  
40  
Input Leakage Current  
µA  
Weak Pull-up On, VIN = 0 V  
104  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14. SMBus  
The SMBus I/O interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus. The SMBus is compliant with the System  
Management Bus Specification, version 1.1, and compatible with the I2C serial bus. Reads and writes to  
the interface by the system controller are byte oriented with the SMBus interface autonomously controlling  
the serial transfer of the data. Data can be transferred at up to 1/10th of the system clock operating as  
master or slave (this can be faster than allowed by the SMBus specification, depending on the system  
clock used). A method of extending the clock-low duration is available to accommodate devices with differ-  
ent speed capabilities on the same bus.  
The SMBus interface may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple mas-  
ters. The SMBus provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and synchronization,  
arbitration logic, and START/STOP control and generation. Three SFRs are associated with the SMBus:  
SMB0CF configures the SMBus; SMB0CN controls the status of the SMBus; and SMB0DAT is the data  
register, used for both transmitting and receiving SMBus data and slave addresses.  
SMB0CN  
SMB0CF  
M T S S A A A S  
A X T T C R C I  
S M A O K B K  
E I B E S S S S  
N N U X M M M M  
S H S T B B B B  
T O  
E D  
R E  
R L  
Q O  
S
M
B
Y H T F C C  
O O T S S  
L E E 1 0  
D
T
00  
01  
10  
11  
T0 Overflow  
T1 Overflow  
TMR2H Overflow  
TMR2L Overflow  
FILTER  
SCL  
SMBUS CONTROL LOGIC  
Arbitration  
Interrupt  
Request  
SCL Synchronization  
SCL Generation (Master Mode)  
SDA Control  
SCL  
Control  
C
R
O
S
S
B
A
R
N
Data Path  
Control  
SDA  
Control  
IRQ Generation  
Port I/O  
SMB0DAT  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
SDA  
FILTER  
N
Figure 14.1. SMBus Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
105  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.1. Supporting Documents  
It is assumed the reader is familiar with or has access to the following supporting documents:  
1. The I2C-Bus and How to Use It (including specifications), Philips Semiconductor.  
2. The I2C-Bus Specification—Version 2.0, Philips Semiconductor.  
3. System Management Bus Specification—Version 1.1, SBS Implementers Forum.  
14.2. SMBus Configuration  
Figure 14.2 shows a typical SMBus configuration. The SMBus specification allows any recessive voltage  
between 3.0 V and 5.0 V; different devices on the bus may operate at different voltage levels. The bi-direc-  
tional SCL (serial clock) and SDA (serial data) lines must be connected to a positive power supply voltage  
through a pullup resistor or similar circuit. Every device connected to the bus must have an open-drain or  
open-collector output for both the SCL and SDA lines, so that both are pulled high (recessive state) when  
the bus is free. The maximum number of devices on the bus is limited only by the requirement that the rise  
and fall times on the bus not exceed 300 ns and 1000 ns, respectively.  
VDD = 5 V  
VDD = 3 V  
VDD = 5 V  
VDD = 3 V  
Master  
Device  
Slave  
Device 1  
Slave  
Device 2  
SDA  
SCL  
Figure 14.2. Typical SMBus Configuration  
14.3. SMBus Operation  
Two types of data transfers are possible: data transfers from a master transmitter to an addressed slave  
receiver (WRITE), and data transfers from an addressed slave transmitter to a master receiver (READ).  
The master device initiates both types of data transfers and provides the serial clock pulses on SCL. The  
SMBus interface may operate as a master or a slave, and multiple master devices on the same bus are  
supported. If two or more masters attempt to initiate a data transfer simultaneously, an arbitration scheme  
is employed with a single master always winning the arbitration. Note that it is not necessary to specify one  
device as the Master in a system; any device that transmits a START and a slave address becomes the  
master for the duration of that transfer.  
A typical SMBus transaction consists of a START condition followed by an address byte (Bits7–1: 7-bit  
slave address; Bit0: R/W direction bit), one or more bytes of data, and a STOP condition. Each byte that is  
received (by a master or slave) must be acknowledged (ACK) with a low SDA during a high SCL (see  
Figure 14.3). If the receiving device does not ACK, the transmitting device will read a NACK (not acknowl-  
edge), which is a high SDA during a high SCL.  
106  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
The direction bit (R/W) occupies the least-significant bit position of the address byte. The direction bit is set  
to logic 1 to indicate a "READ" operation and cleared to logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation.  
All transactions are initiated by a master, with one or more addressed slave devices as the target. The  
master generates the START condition and then transmits the slave address and direction bit. If the trans-  
action is a WRITE operation from the master to the slave, the master transmits the data a byte at a time  
waiting for an ACK from the slave at the end of each byte. For READ operations, the slave transmits the  
data waiting for an ACK from the master at the end of each byte. At the end of the data transfer, the master  
generates a STOP condition to terminate the transaction and free the bus. Figure 14.3 illustrates a typical  
SMBus transaction.  
SCL  
SDA  
SLA6  
SLA5-0  
R/W  
D7  
D6-0  
START  
Slave Address + R/W  
ACK  
Data Byte  
NACK  
STOP  
Figure 14.3. SMBus Transaction  
14.3.1. Arbitration  
A master may start a transfer only if the bus is free. The bus is free after a STOP condition or after the SCL  
and SDA lines remain high for a specified time (see Section “14.3.4. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout”  
on page 108). In the event that two or more devices attempt to begin a transfer at the same time, an arbi-  
tration scheme is employed to force one master to give up the bus. The master devices continue transmit-  
ting until one attempts a HIGH while the other transmits a LOW. Since the bus is open-drain, the bus will  
be pulled LOW. The master attempting the HIGH will detect a LOW SDA and lose the arbitration. The win-  
ning master continues its transmission without interruption; the losing master becomes a slave and  
receives the rest of the transfer if addressed. This arbitration scheme is non-destructive: one device  
always wins, and no data is lost.  
Rev. 0.5  
107  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.3.2. Clock Low Extension  
SMBus provides a clock synchronization mechanism, similar to I2C, which allows devices with different  
speed capabilities to coexist on the bus. A clock-low extension is used during a transfer in order to allow  
slower slave devices to communicate with faster masters. The slave may temporarily hold the SCL line  
LOW to extend the clock low period, effectively decreasing the serial clock frequency.  
14.3.3. SCL Low Timeout  
If the SCL line is held low by a slave device on the bus, no further communication is possible. Furthermore,  
the master cannot force the SCL line high to correct the error condition. To solve this problem, the SMBus  
protocol specifies that devices participating in a transfer must detect any clock cycle held low longer than  
25 ms as a “timeout” condition. Devices that have detected the timeout condition must reset the communi-  
cation no later than 10 ms after detecting the timeout condition.  
When the SMBTOE bit in SMB0CF is set, Timer 2 is used to detect SCL low timeouts. Timer 2 is forced to  
reload when SCL is high, and allowed to count when SCL is low. With Timer 2 enabled and configured to  
overflow after 25 ms (and SMBTOE set), the Timer 2 interrupt service routine can be used to reset (disable  
and re-enable) the SMBus in the event of an SCL low timeout. Timer 2 configuration details can be found  
in Section “16.2. Timer 2” on page 139.  
14.3.4. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout  
The SMBus specification stipulates that if the SCL and SDA lines remain high for more that 50 µs, the bus  
is designated as free. When the SMBFTE bit in SMB0CF is set, the bus will be considered free if SCL and  
SDA remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods. If the SMBus is waiting to generate a  
Master START, the START will be generated following this timeout. Note that a clock source is required for  
free timeout detection, even in a slave-only implementation.  
14.4. Using the SMBus  
The SMBus can operate in both Master and Slave modes. The interface provides timing and shifting con-  
trol for serial transfers; higher level protocol is determined by user software. The SMBus interface provides  
the following application-independent features:  
Byte-wise serial data transfers  
Clock signal generation on SCL (Master Mode only) and SDA data synchronization  
Timeout/bus error recognition, as defined by the SMB0CF configuration register  
START/STOP timing, detection, and generation  
Bus arbitration  
Interrupt generation  
Status information  
SMBus interrupts are generated for each data byte or slave address that is transferred. When transmitting,  
this interrupt is generated after the ACK cycle so that software may read the received ACK value; when  
receiving data, this interrupt is generated before the ACK cycle so that software may define the outgoing  
ACK value. See Section “14.5. SMBus Transfer Modes” on page 117 for more details on transmission  
sequences.  
108  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Interrupts are also generated to indicate the beginning of a transfer when a master (START generated), or  
the end of a transfer when a slave (STOP detected). Software should read the SMB0CN (SMBus Control  
register) to find the cause of the SMBus interrupt. The SMB0CN register is described in Section  
“14.4.2. SMB0CN Control Register” on page 113; Table 14.4 provides a quick SMB0CN decoding refer-  
ence.  
SMBus configuration options include:  
Timeout detection (SCL Low Timeout and/or Bus Free Timeout)  
SDA setup and hold time extensions  
Slave event enable/disable  
Clock source selection  
These options are selected in the SMB0CF register, as described in Section “14.4.1. SMBus Configura-  
tion Register” on page 110.  
Rev. 0.5  
109  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register  
The SMBus Configuration register (SMB0CF) is used to enable the SMBus Master and/or Slave modes,  
select the SMBus clock source, and select the SMBus timing and timeout options. When the ENSMB bit is  
set, the SMBus is enabled for all master and slave events. Slave events may be disabled by setting the  
INH bit. With slave events inhibited, the SMBus interface will still monitor the SCL and SDA pins; however,  
the interface will NACK all received addresses and will not generate any slave interrupts. When the INH bit  
is set, all slave events will be inhibited following the next START (interrupts will continue for the duration of  
the current transfer).  
Table 14.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection  
SMBCS1  
SMBCS0  
SMBus Clock Source  
Timer 0 Overflow  
Timer 1 Overflow  
Timer 2 High Byte Overflow  
Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The SMBCS1–0 bits select the SMBus clock source, which is used only when operating as a master or  
when the Free Timeout detection is enabled. When operating as a master, overflows from the selected  
source determine the absolute minimum SCL low and high times as defined in Equation 14.1. Note that the  
selected clock source may be shared by other peripherals so long as the timer is left running at all times.  
For example, Timer 1 overflows may generate the SMBus and UART baud rates simultaneously. Timer  
configuration is covered in Section “16. Timers” on page 131.  
1
---------------------------------------------  
THighMin = TLowMin  
=
fClockSourceOverflow  
Equation 14.1. Minimum SCL High and Low Times  
The selected clock source should be configured to establish the minimum SCL High and Low times as per  
Equation 14.1. When the interface is operating as a master (and SCL is not driven or extended by any  
other devices on the bus), the typical SMBus bit rate is approximated by Equation 14.2.  
fClockSourceOverflow  
---------------------------------------------  
BitRate =  
3
Equation 14.2. Typical SMBus Bit Rate  
Figure 14.4 shows the typical SCL generation described by Equation 14.2. Notice that THIGH is typically  
twice as large as TLOW. The actual SCL output may vary due to other devices on the bus (SCL may be  
extended low by slower slave devices, or driven low by contending master devices). The bit rate when  
operating as a master will never exceed the limits defined by equation Equation 14.1.  
110  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Timer Source  
Overflows  
SCL  
TLow  
THigh  
SCL High Timeout  
Figure 14.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation  
Setting the EXTHOLD bit extends the minimum setup and hold times for the SDA line. The minimum SDA  
setup time defines the absolute minimum time that SDA is stable before SCL transitions from low-to-high.  
The minimum SDA hold time defines the absolute minimum time that the current SDA value remains stable  
after SCL transitions from high-to-low. EXTHOLD should be set so that the minimum setup and hold times  
meet the SMBus Specification requirements of 250 ns and 300 ns, respectively. Table 14.2 shows the min-  
imum setup and hold times for the two EXTHOLD settings. Setup and hold time extensions are typically  
necessary when SYSCLK is above 10 MHz.  
Table 14.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times  
EXTHOLD  
Minimum SDA Setup Time  
Minimum SDA Hold Time  
Tlow - 4 system clocks  
0
1
3 system clocks  
OR  
1 system clock + s/w delay*  
11 system clocks  
12 system clocks  
*Note: Setup Time for ACK bit transmissions and the MSB of all data transfers. The s/w  
delay occurs between the time SMB0DAT or ACK is written and when SI is cleared.  
Note that if SI is cleared in the same write that defines the outgoing ACK value, s/w  
delay is zero.  
With the SMBTOE bit set, Timer 2 should be configured to overflow after 25 ms in order to detect SCL low  
timeouts (see Section “14.3.3. SCL Low Timeout” on page 108). The SMBus interface will force Timer 2  
to reload while SCL is high, and allow Timer 2 to count when SCL is low. The Timer 2 interrupt service rou-  
tine should be used to reset SMBus communication by disabling and re-enabling the SMBus. Timer 2 con-  
figuration is described in Section “16.2. Timer 2” on page 139.  
SMBus Free Timeout detection can be enabled by setting the SMBFTE bit. When this bit is set, the bus will  
be considered free if SDA and SCL remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (see  
Figure 14.4). When a Free Timeout is detected, the interface will respond as if a STOP was detected (an  
interrupt will be generated, and STO will be set).  
Rev. 0.5  
111  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 14.1. SMB0CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration  
R/W  
ENSMB  
Bit7  
R/W  
INH  
Bit6  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Reset Value  
BUSY EXTHOLD SMBTOE SMBFTE SMBCS1 SMBCS0 00000000  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
0xC1  
Bit7:  
ENSMB: SMBus Enable.  
This bit enables/disables the SMBus interface. When enabled, the interface constantly mon-  
itors the SDA and SCL pins.  
0: SMBus interface disabled.  
1: SMBus interface enabled.  
Bit6:  
INH: SMBus Slave Inhibit.  
When this bit is set to logic 1, the SMBus does not generate an interrupt when slave events  
occur. This effectively removes the SMBus slave from the bus. Master Mode interrupts are  
not affected.  
0: SMBus Slave Mode enabled.  
1: SMBus Slave Mode inhibited.  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
BUSY: SMBus Busy Indicator.  
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a transfer is in progress. It is cleared to logic 0  
when a STOP or free-timeout is sensed.  
EXTHOLD: SMBus Setup and Hold Time Extension Enable.  
This bit controls the SDA setup and hold times according to Table 14.2.  
0: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times disabled.  
1: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times enabled.  
Bit3:  
SMBTOE: SMBus SCL Timeout Detection Enable.  
This bit enables SCL low timeout detection. If set to logic 1, the SMBus forces Timer 2 to  
reload while SCL is high and allows Timer 2 to count when SCL goes low. If Timer 2 is con-  
figured in split mode (T2SPLIT is set), only the high byte of Timer 2 is held in reload while  
SCL is high. Timer 2 should be programmed to generate interrupts at 25 ms, and the Timer  
2 interrupt service routine should reset SMBus communication.  
SMBFTE: SMBus Free Timeout Detection Enable.  
Bit2:  
When this bit is set to logic 1, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high for  
more than 10 SMBus clock source periods.  
Bits1–0: SMBCS1–SMBCS0: SMBus Clock Source Selection.  
These two bits select the SMBus clock source, which is used to generate the SMBus bit  
rate. The selected device should be configured according to Equation 14.1.  
SMBCS1 SMBCS0  
SMBus Clock Source  
Timer 0 Overflow  
Timer 1 Overflow  
Timer 2 High Byte Overflow  
Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
112  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.4.2. SMB0CN Control Register  
SMB0CN is used to control the interface and to provide status information (see SFR Definition 14.2). The  
higher four bits of SMB0CN (MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO) form a status vector that can be used to  
jump to service routines. MASTER and TXMODE indicate the master/slave state and transmit/receive  
modes, respectively.  
The STA bit indicates that a START has been detected or generated since the last SMBus interrupt. When  
set to ‘1’, the STA bit will cause the SMBus to enter Master mode and generate a START when the bus  
becomes free. STA is not cleared by hardware after the START is generated; it must be cleared by soft-  
ware.  
As a master, writing the STO bit will cause the hardware to generate a STOP condition and end the current  
transfer after the next ACK cycle. STO is cleared by hardware after the STOP condition is generated. As a  
slave, STO indicates that a STOP condition has been detected since the last SMBus interrupt. STO is also  
used in slave mode to manage the transition from slave receiver to slave transmitter; see Section 14.5.4  
for details on this procedure.  
If STO and STA are both set to ‘1’ (while in Master Mode), a STOP followed by a START will be generated.  
As a receiver, writing the ACK bit defines the outgoing ACK value; as a transmitter, reading the ACK bit  
indicates the value received on the last ACK cycle. ACKRQ is set each time a byte is received, indicating  
that an outgoing ACK value is needed. When ACKRQ is set, software should write the desired outgoing  
value to the ACK bit before clearing SI. A NACK will be generated if software does not write the ACK bit  
before clearing SI. SDA will reflect the defined ACK value immediately following a write to the ACK bit;  
however SCL will remain low until SI is cleared. If a received slave address is not acknowledged, further  
slave events will be ignored until the next START is detected.  
The ARBLOST bit indicates that the interface has lost an arbitration. This may occur anytime the interface  
is transmitting (master or slave). A lost arbitration while operating as a slave indicates a bus error condi-  
tion. ARBLOST is cleared by hardware each time SI is cleared.  
The SI bit (SMBus Interrupt Flag) is set at the beginning and end of each transfer, after each byte frame, or  
when an arbitration is lost; see Table 14.3 for more details.  
Important Note About the SI Bit: The SMBus interface is stalled while SI is set; thus SCL is held low, and  
the bus is stalled until software clears SI.  
Table 14.3 lists all sources for hardware changes to the SMB0CN bits. Refer to Table 14.4 for SMBus sta-  
tus decoding using the SMB0CN register.  
Rev. 0.5  
113  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 14.2. SMB0CN: SMBus Control  
R
R
R/W  
STA  
Bit5  
R/W  
STO  
Bit4  
R
R
R/W  
ACK  
Bit1  
R/W  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xC0  
MASTER TXMODE  
ACKRQ ARBLOST  
SI  
Bit0  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit3  
Bit2  
(bit addressable)  
Bit7:  
MASTER: SMBus Master/Slave Indicator.  
This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus is operating as a master.  
0: SMBus operating in Slave Mode.  
1: SMBus operating in Master Mode.  
TXMODE: SMBus Transmit Mode Indicator.  
This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus is operating as a transmitter.  
0: SMBus in Receiver Mode.  
Bit6:  
Bit5:  
1: SMBus in Transmitter Mode.  
STA: SMBus Start Flag.  
Write:  
0: No Start generated.  
1: When operating as a master, a START condition is transmitted if the bus is free (If the bus  
is not free, the START is transmitted after a STOP is received or a free timeout is detected).  
If STA is set by software as an active Master, a repeated START will be generated after the  
next ACK cycle.  
Read:  
0: No Start or repeated Start detected.  
1: Start or repeated Start detected.  
Bit4:  
STO: SMBus Stop Flag.  
Write:  
As a master, setting this bit to ‘1’ causes a STOP condition to be transmitted after the next  
ACK cycle. STO is cleared to ‘0’ by hardware when the STOP is generated.  
As a slave, software manages this bit when switching from Slave Receiver to Slave Trans-  
mitter mode. See Section 14.5.4 for details.  
Read:  
0: No Stop condition detected.  
1: Stop condition detected (if in Slave Mode) or pending (if in Master Mode).  
ACKRQ: SMBus Acknowledge Request.  
This read-only bit is set to logic 1 when the SMBus has received a byte and needs the ACK  
bit to be written with the correct ACK response value.  
ARBLOST: SMBus Arbitration Lost Indicator.  
This read-only bit is set to logic 1 when the SMBus loses arbitration while operating as a  
transmitter. A lost arbitration while a slave indicates a bus error condition.  
ACK: SMBus Acknowledge Flag.  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
This bit defines the out-going ACK level and records incoming ACK levels. It should be writ-  
ten each time a byte is received (when ACKRQ=1), or read after each byte is transmitted.  
0: A "not acknowledge" has been received (if in Transmitter Mode) OR will be transmitted (if  
in Receiver Mode).  
1: An "acknowledge" has been received (if in Transmitter Mode) OR will be transmitted (if in  
Receiver Mode).  
Bit0:  
SI: SMBus Interrupt Flag.  
This bit is set by hardware under the conditions listed in Table 14.3. SI must be cleared by  
software. While SI is set, SCL is held low and the SMBus is stalled.  
114  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 14.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN  
Bit  
Set by Hardware When:  
A START is generated.  
Cleared by Hardware When:  
A STOP is generated.  
Arbitration is lost.  
MASTER  
START is generated.  
A START is detected.  
The SMBus interface enters transmitter mode Arbitration is lost.  
(after SMB0DAT is written before the start of SMB0DAT is not written before the  
TXMODE  
an SMBus frame).  
start of an SMBus frame.  
A START followed by an address byte is  
received.  
A STOP is detected while addressed as a  
slave.  
Arbitration is lost due to a detected STOP.  
A byte has been received and an ACK  
response value is needed.  
Must be cleared by software.  
STA  
STO  
A pending STOP is generated.  
After each ACK cycle.  
ACKRQ  
A repeated START is detected as a MASTER Each time SI is cleared.  
when STA is low (unwanted repeated START).  
SCL is sensed low while attempting to gener-  
ate a STOP or repeated START condition.  
SDA is sensed low while transmitting a ‘1’  
(excluding ACK bits).  
The incoming ACK value is low (ACKNOWL- The incoming ACK value is high (NOT  
EDGE).  
ARBLOST  
ACK  
ACKNOWLEDGE).  
A START has been generated.  
Lost arbitration.  
Must be cleared by software.  
A byte has been transmitted and an  
ACK/NACK received.  
A byte has been received.  
A START or repeated START followed by a  
slave address + R/W has been received.  
A STOP has been received.  
SI  
Rev. 0.5  
115  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.4.3. Data Register  
The SMBus Data register SMB0DAT holds a byte of serial data to be transmitted or one that has just been  
received. Software may safely read or write to the data register when the SI flag is set. Software should not  
attempt to access the SMB0DAT register when the SMBus is enabled and the SI flag is cleared to logic 0,  
as the interface may be in the process of shifting a byte of data into or out of the register.  
Data in SMB0DAT is always shifted out MSB first. After a byte has been received, the first bit of received  
data is located at the MSB of SMB0DAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously  
being shifted in. SMB0DAT always contains the last data byte present on the bus. In the event of lost arbi-  
tration, the transition from master transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data or address in  
SMB0DAT.  
SFR Definition 14.3. SMB0DAT: SMBus Data  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xC2  
Bits7–0: SMB0DAT: SMBus Data.  
The SMB0DAT register contains a byte of data to be transmitted on the SMBus serial inter-  
face or a byte that has just been received on the SMBus serial interface. The CPU can read  
from or write to this register whenever the SI serial interrupt flag (SMB0CN.0) is set to logic  
one. The serial data in the register remains stable as long as the SI flag is set. When the SI  
flag is not set, the system may be in the process of shifting data in/out and the CPU should  
not attempt to access this register.  
116  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.5. SMBus Transfer Modes  
The SMBus interface may be configured to operate as master and/or slave. At any particular time, it will be  
operating in one of the following four modes: Master Transmitter, Master Receiver, Slave Transmitter, or  
Slave Receiver. The SMBus interface enters Master Mode any time a START is generated, and remains in  
Master Mode until it loses arbitration or generates a STOP. An SMBus interrupt is generated at the end of  
all SMBus byte frames; however, note that the interrupt is generated before the ACK cycle when operating  
as a receiver, and after the ACK cycle when operating as a transmitter.  
14.5.1. Master Transmitter Mode  
Serial data is transmitted on SDA while the serial clock is output on SCL. The SMBus interface generates  
the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data  
direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0 (WRITE). The master then transmits  
one or more bytes of serial data. After each byte is transmitted, an acknowledge bit is generated by the  
slave. The transfer is ended when the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. Note that the interface will  
switch to Master Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Master Transmitter interrupt.  
Figure 14.5 shows a typical Master Transmitter sequence. Two transmit data bytes are shown, though any  
number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur after the ACK  
cycle in this mode.  
S
SLA  
W
A
Data Byte  
A
Data Byte  
A
P
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
S = START  
P = STOP  
A = ACK  
Received by SMBus  
Interface  
W = WRITE  
Transmitted by  
SLA = Slave Address  
SMBus Interface  
Figure 14.5. Typical Master Transmitter Sequence  
Rev. 0.5  
117  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.5.2. Master Receiver Mode  
Serial data is received on SDA while the serial clock is output on SCL. The SMBus interface generates the  
START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direc-  
tion bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1 (READ). Serial data is then received from the  
slave on SDA while the SMBus outputs the serial clock. The slave transmits one or more bytes of serial  
data. After each byte is received, ACKRQ is set to ‘1’ and an interrupt is generated. Software must write  
the ACK bit (SMB0CN.1) to define the outgoing acknowledge value (Note: writing a ‘1’ to the ACK bit gen-  
erates an ACK; writing a ‘0’ generates a NACK). Software should write a ‘0’ to the ACK bit after the last  
byte is received, to transmit a NACK. The interface exits Master Receiver Mode after the STO bit is set and  
a STOP is generated. Note that the interface will switch to Master Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written  
while an active Master Receiver. Figure 14.6 shows a typical Master Receiver sequence. Two received  
data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’  
interrupts occur before the ACK cycle in this mode.  
S
SLA  
R
A
Data Byte  
A
Data Byte  
N
P
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
S = START  
P = STOP  
A = ACK  
Received by SMBus  
Interface  
N = NACK  
R = READ  
SLA = Slave Address  
Transmitted by  
SMBus Interface  
Figure 14.6. Typical Master Receiver Sequence  
118  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.5.3. Slave Receiver Mode  
Serial data is received on SDA and the clock is received on SCL. When slave events are enabled (INH =  
0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode when a START followed by a slave address and direction bit  
(WRITE in this case) is received. Upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the  
ACKRQ bit is set. Software responds to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignores the received  
slave address with a NACK. If the received slave address is ignored, slave interrupts will be inhibited until  
the next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are  
received. Software must write the ACK bit after each received byte to ACK or NACK the received byte. The  
interface exits Slave Receiver Mode after receiving a STOP. Note that the interface will switch to Slave  
Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Slave Receiver; see Section 14.5.4 for details on  
this procedure. Figure 14.7 shows a typical Slave Receiver sequence. Two received data bytes are shown,  
though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur  
before the ACK cycle in this mode.  
Interrupt  
S
SLA  
W
A
Data Byte  
A
Data Byte  
A
P
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
S = START  
P = STOP  
A = ACK  
Received by SMBus  
Interface  
R = READ  
SLA = Slave Address  
Transmitted by  
SMBus Interface  
Figure 14.7. Typical Slave Receiver Sequence  
Rev. 0.5  
119  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
14.5.4. Slave Transmitter Mode  
Serial data is transmitted on SDA and the clock is received on SCL. When slave events are enabled (INH  
= 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode (to receive the slave address) when a START followed by a  
slave address and direction bit (READ in this case) is received. Software responds to the received slave  
address with an ACK, or ignores the received slave address with a NACK. If the received address is  
ignored, slave interrupts will be inhibited until the next START is detected. If the received slave address is  
acknowledged, software should write data to SMB0DAT to force the SMBus into Slave Transmitter Mode.  
The switch from Slave Receiver to Slave Transmitter requires software management. Software should per-  
form the steps outlined below only when a valid slave address is received (indicated by the label “RX-to-TX  
Steps” in Figure 14.8).  
Step 1. Set ACK to ‘1’.  
Step 2. Write outgoing data to SMB0DAT.  
Step 3. Check SMB0DAT.7; if ‘1’, do not perform steps 4, 6 or 7.  
Step 4. Set STO to ‘1’.  
Step 5. Clear SI to ‘0’.  
Step 6. Poll for TXMODE => ‘1’.  
Step 7. Clear STO to ‘0’ (must be done before the next ACK cycle).  
The interface enters Slave Transmitter Mode and transmits one or more bytes of data (the above steps are  
only required before the first byte of the transfer). After each byte is transmitted, the master sends an  
acknowledge bit; if the acknowledge bit is an ACK, SMB0DAT should be written with the next data byte. If  
the acknowledge bit is a NACK, SMB0DAT should not be written to before SI is cleared (Note: an error  
condition may be generated if SMB0DAT is written following a received NACK while in Slave Transmitter  
Mode). The interface exits Slave Transmitter Mode after receiving a STOP. Note that the interface will  
switch to Slave Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Slave Transmitter interrupt.  
Figure 14.8 shows a typical Slave Transmitter sequence. Two transmitted data bytes are shown, though  
any number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur after the  
ACK cycle in this mode.  
Perform RX-to-TX  
Steps Here  
Interrupt  
S
SLA  
R
A
Data Byte  
A
Data Byte  
N
P
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
S = START  
P = STOP  
N = NACK  
W = WRITE  
Received by SMBus  
Interface  
Transmitted by  
SMBus Interface  
SLA = Slave Address  
Figure 14.8. Typical Slave Transmitter Sequence  
14.6. SMBus Status Decoding  
The current SMBus status can be easily decoded using the SMB0CN register. In the table below, STATUS  
VECTOR refers to the four upper bits of SMB0CN: MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO. Note that the  
shown response options are only the typical responses; application-specific procedures are allowed as  
long as they conform with the SMBus specification. Highlighted responses are allowed but do not conform  
to the SMBus specification.  
120  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 14.4. SMBus Status Decoding  
Values  
Written  
Values Read  
Current SMbus State  
Typical Response Options  
A master START was gen- Load slave address + R/W into  
1110  
1100  
0
0
0
0
X
0
1
0
0
0
1
X
X
X
erated.  
SMB0DAT.  
A master data or address  
Set STA to restart transfer.  
0 byte was transmitted; NACK  
received.  
Abort transfer.  
Load next data byte into SMB0DAT  
End transfer with STOP  
0
0
0
1
X
X
End transfer with STOP and start  
another transfer.  
A master data or address  
1 byte was transmitted; ACK  
received.  
1
1
1
0
X
X
0
0
Send repeated START  
Switch to Master Receiver Mode  
(clear SI without writing new data  
to SMB0DAT).  
0
0
X
Acknowledge received byte; Read  
SMB0DAT.  
0
0
0
1
1
0
Send NACK to indicate last byte,  
and send STOP.  
Send NACK to indicate last byte,  
and send STOP followed by  
START.  
1
1
0
Send ACK followed by repeated  
START.  
A master data byte was  
X
1
1
0
0
1
0
1000  
1
0
received; ACK requested.  
Send NACK to indicate last byte,  
and send repeated START.  
Send ACK and switch to Master  
Transmitter Mode (write to  
SMB0DAT before clearing SI).  
0
0
0
0
1
0
Send NACK and switch to Mas-  
ter Transmitter Mode (write to  
SMB0DAT before clearing SI).  
A slave byte was transmit- No action required (expecting  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
X
X
ted; NACK received.  
A slave byte was transmit- Load SMB0DAT with next data  
ted; ACK received. byte to transmit.  
A Slave byte was transmit- No action required (expecting Mas-  
STOP condition).  
0100  
0101  
ted; error detected.  
ter to end transfer).  
A STOP was detected while  
X an addressed Slave Trans-  
mitter.  
No action required (transfer com-  
plete).  
0
X
0
0
X
Rev. 0.5  
121  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 14.4. SMBus Status Decoding (Continued)  
Values  
Written  
Values Read  
Current SMbus State  
Typical Response Options  
Acknowledge received address  
(received slave address match,  
R/W bit = READ).  
0
0
0
0
1
0
Do not acknowledge received  
address.  
A slave address was  
received; ACK requested.  
1
0
X
Acknowledge received address,  
and switch to transmitter mode  
(received slave address match,  
R/W bit = WRITE); see Section  
14.5.4 for procedure.  
0
0
1
Acknowledge received address  
(received slave address match,  
R/W bit = READ).  
0010  
0
0
0
0
1
0
Do not acknowledge received  
address.  
Lost arbitration as master;  
X slave address received;  
ACK requested.  
Acknowledge received address,  
and switch to transmitter mode  
(received slave address match,  
R/W bit = WRITE); see Section  
14.5.4 for procedure.  
1
1
0
0
1
Reschedule failed transfer; do not  
acknowledge received address  
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
Lost arbitration while  
X attempting a repeated  
START.  
Abort failed transfer.  
X
X
0010  
0001  
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Reschedule failed transfer.  
Lost arbitration while  
X
No action required (transfer com-  
plete/aborted).  
0
0
0
0
0
attempting a STOP.  
A STOP was detected while  
X an addressed slave  
receiver.  
No action required (transfer com-  
plete).  
X
Abort transfer.  
0
1
0
0
X
X
Lost arbitration due to a  
detected STOP.  
X
Reschedule failed transfer.  
Acknowledge received byte; Read  
SMB0DAT.  
0
0
1
A slave byte was received;  
ACK requested.  
1
1
0
1
X
Do not acknowledge received byte. 0  
0
0
0
0
0000  
Lost arbitration while trans- Abort failed transfer.  
X mitting a data byte as mas-  
0
Reschedule failed transfer.  
ter.  
1
0
0
122  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
15. UART0  
UART0 is an asynchronous, full duplex serial port offering modes 1 and 3 of the standard 8051 UART.  
Enhanced baud rate support allows a wide range of clock sources to generate standard baud rates (details  
in Section “15.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation” on page 124). Received data buffering allows  
UART0 to start reception of a second incoming data byte before software has finished reading the previous  
data byte.  
UART0 has two associated SFRs: Serial Control Register 0 (SCON0) and Serial Data Buffer 0 (SBUF0).  
The single SBUF0 location provides access to both transmit and receive registers. Reading SBUF0  
accesses the buffered Receive register; writing SBUF0 accesses the Transmit register.  
With UART0 interrupts enabled, an interrupt is generated each time a transmit is completed (TI0 is set in  
SCON0), or a data byte has been received (RI0 is set in SCON0). The UART0 interrupt flags are not  
cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine. They must be cleared manually  
by software, allowing software to determine the cause of the UART0 interrupt (transmit complete or receive  
complete).  
SFR Bus  
Write to  
SBUF  
TB8  
SBUF  
SET  
(TX Shift)  
D
Q
TX  
CLR  
Crossbar  
Zero Detector  
Stop Bit  
Shift  
Data  
Send  
Start  
Tx Control  
Tx Clock  
Tx IRQ  
SCON0  
TI  
RI  
UART Baud  
Rate Generator  
Serial  
Port  
Interrupt  
Port I/O  
Rx IRQ  
Rx Clock  
Rx Control  
Load  
SBUF  
Start  
Shift  
0x1FF  
RB8  
Input Shift Register  
(9 bits)  
Load SBUF0  
SBUF  
(RX Latch)  
Read  
SBUF  
SFR Bus  
RX  
Crossbar  
Figure 15.1. UART0 Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
123  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
15.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation  
The UART0 baud rate is generated by Timer 1 in 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TX clock is generated by  
TL1; the RX clock is generated by a copy of TL1 (shown as RX Timer in Figure 15.2), which is not user-  
accessible. Both TX and RX Timer overflows are divided by two to generate the TX and RX baud rates.  
The RX Timer runs when Timer 1 is enabled, and uses the same reload value (TH1). However, an  
RX Timer reload is forced when a START condition is detected on the RX pin. This allows a receive to  
begin any time a START is detected, independent of the TX Timer state.  
Timer 1  
TL1  
UART0  
Overflow  
TX Clock  
2
2
TH1  
Start  
Detected  
Overflow  
RX Clock  
RX Timer  
Figure 15.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic  
Timer 1 should be configured for Mode 2, 8-bit auto-reload (see Section “16.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit  
Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload” on page 133). The Timer 1 reload value should be set so that over-  
flows will occur at two times the desired UART baud rate frequency. Note that Timer 1 may be clocked by  
one of five sources: SYSCLK, SYSCLK / 4, SYSCLK / 12, SYSCLK / 48, or the external oscillator clock / 8.  
For any given Timer 1 clock source, the UART0 baud rate is determined by Equation 15.1.  
T1CLK  
1
------------------------------ --  
UartBaudRate =  
×
(256 – T1H) 2  
Equation 15.1. UART0 Baud Rate  
Where T1CLK is the frequency of the clock supplied to Timer 1, and T1H is the high byte of Timer 1 (reload  
value). Timer 1 clock frequency is selected as described in Section “16.2. Timer 2” on page 139. A quick  
reference for typical baud rates and system clock frequencies is given in Tables 14.1 through 14.6. Note  
that the internal oscillator may still generate the system clock when the external oscillator is driving Timer 1  
(see Section “16.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1” on page 131 for more details).  
124  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
15.2. Operational Modes  
UART0 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication. The UART mode (8-bit or 9-bit) is  
selected by the S0MODE bit (SCON0.7). Typical UART connection options are shown in Figure 15.3.  
TX  
RS-232  
RS-232  
LEVEL  
XLTR  
C8051Fxxx  
RX  
OR  
TX  
RX  
TX  
RX  
MCU  
C8051Fxxx  
Figure 15.3. UART Interconnect Diagram  
15.2.1. 8-Bit UART  
8-Bit UART mode uses a total of 10 bits per data byte: one start bit, eight data bits (LSB first), and one stop  
bit. Data are transmitted LSB first from the TX pin and received at the RX pin. On receive, the eight data  
bits are stored in SBUF0 and the stop bit goes into RB80 (SCON0.2).  
Data transmission begins when software writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit Inter-  
rupt Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data recep-  
tion can begin any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to logic 1. After the stop bit is  
received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met:  
RI0 must be logic 0, and if MCE0 is logic 1, the stop bit must be logic 1. In the event of a receive data over-  
run, the first received 8 bits are latched into the SBUF0 receive register and the following overrun data bits  
are lost.  
If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data is stored in SBUF0, the stop bit is stored in RB80 and the  
RI0 flag is set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not  
be set. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 is set.  
MARK  
START  
BIT  
STOP  
BIT  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
SPACE  
BIT TIMES  
BIT SAMPLING  
Figure 15.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
125  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
15.2.2. 9-Bit UART  
9-bit UART mode uses a total of eleven bits per data byte: a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a programma-  
ble ninth data bit, and a stop bit. The state of the ninth transmit data bit is determined by the value in TB80  
(SCON0.3), which is assigned by user software. It can be assigned the value of the parity flag (bit P in reg-  
ister PSW) for error detection, or used in multiprocessor communications. On receive, the ninth data bit  
goes into RB80 (SCON0.2) and the stop bit is ignored.  
Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit  
Interrupt Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data  
reception can begin any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to ‘1’. After the stop bit  
is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met:  
(1) RI0 must be logic 0, and (2) if MCE0 is logic 1, the 9th bit must be logic 1 (when MCE0 is logic 0, the  
state of the ninth data bit is unimportant). If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data are stored in  
SBUF0, the ninth bit is stored in RB80, and the RI0 flag is set to ‘1’. If the above conditions are not met,  
SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not be set to ‘1’. A UART0 interrupt will occur if  
enabled when either TI0 or RI0 is set to ‘1’.  
MARK  
START  
BIT  
STOP  
BIT  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
SPACE  
BIT TIMES  
BIT SAMPLING  
Figure 15.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram  
15.3. Multiprocessor Communications  
9-Bit UART mode supports multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more  
slave processors by special use of the ninth data bit. When a master processor wants to transmit to one or  
more slaves, it first sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte  
in that its ninth bit is logic 1; in a data byte, the ninth bit is always set to logic 0.  
Setting the MCE0 bit (SCON.5) of a slave processor configures its UART such that when a stop bit is  
received, the UART will generate an interrupt only if the ninth bit is logic one (RB80 = 1) signifying an  
address byte has been received. In the UART interrupt handler, software will compare the received  
address with the slave's own assigned 8-bit address. If the addresses match, the slave will clear its MCE0  
bit to enable interrupts on the reception of the following data byte(s). Slaves that weren't addressed leave  
their MCE0 bits set and do not generate interrupts on the reception of the following data bytes, thereby  
ignoring the data. Once the entire message is received, the addressed slave resets its MCE0 bit to ignore  
all transmissions until it receives the next address byte.  
Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple  
slaves, thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The master  
processor can be configured to receive all transmissions or a protocol can be implemented such that the  
master/slave role is temporarily reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master  
and slave(s).  
126  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Master  
Device  
Slave  
Device  
Slave  
Device  
Slave  
Device  
+5V  
RX  
TX  
RX  
TX  
RX  
TX  
RX  
TX  
Figure 15.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
127  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 15.1. SCON0: Serial Port 0 Control  
R/W  
S0MODE  
Bit7  
R/W  
-
R/W  
MCE0  
Bit5  
R/W  
REN0  
Bit4  
R/W  
TB80  
Bit3  
R/W  
RB80  
Bit2  
R/W  
TI0  
Bit1  
R/W  
RI0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x98  
Bit6  
Bit0  
(bit addressable)  
Bit7:  
S0MODE: Serial Port 0 Operation Mode.  
This bit selects the UART0 Operation Mode.  
0: Mode 0: 8-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate  
1: Mode 1: 9-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate  
UNUSED. Read = 1b. Write = don’t care.  
MCE0: Multiprocessor Communication Enable.  
Bit6:  
Bit5:  
The function of this bit is dependent on the Serial Port 0 Operation Mode.  
Mode 0: Checks for valid stop bit.  
0: Logic level of stop bit is ignored.  
1: RI0 will only be activated if stop bit is logic level 1.  
Mode 1: Multiprocessor Communications Enable.  
0: Logic level of ninth bit is ignored.  
1: RI0 is set and an interrupt is generated only when the ninth bit is logic 1.  
REN0: Receive Enable.  
Bit4:  
This bit enables/disables the UART receiver.  
0: UART0 reception disabled.  
1: UART0 reception enabled.  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
TB80: Ninth Transmission Bit.  
The logic level of this bit will be assigned to the ninth transmission bit in 9-bit UART Mode. It  
is not used in 8-bit UART Mode. Set or cleared by software as required.  
RB80: Ninth Receive Bit.  
RB80 is assigned the value of the STOP bit in Mode 0; it is assigned the value of the 9th  
data bit in Mode 1.  
TI0: Transmit Interrupt Flag.  
Set by hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by UART0 (after the 8th bit in 8-  
bit UART Mode, or at the beginning of the STOP bit in 9-bit UART Mode). When the UART0  
interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service  
routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software  
RI0: Receive Interrupt Flag.  
Bit0:  
Set to ‘1’ by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART0 (set at the STOP bit  
sampling time). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit to ‘1’ causes the CPU  
to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by soft-  
ware.  
128  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 15.2. SBUF0: Serial (UART0) Port Data Buffer  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x99  
Bits7–0: SBUF0[7:0]: Serial Data Buffer Bits 7–0 (MSB–LSB)  
This SFR accesses two registers; a transmit shift register and a receive latch register. When  
data is written to SBUF0, it goes to the transmit shift register and is held for serial transmis-  
sion. Writing a byte to SBUF0 is what initiates the transmission. A read of SBUF0 returns the  
contents of the receive latch.  
Rev. 0.5  
129  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Table 15.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using  
the Internal 24.5 MHz Oscillator  
Frequency: 24.5 MHz  
Target  
Baud Rate  
(bps)  
Baud Rate  
% Error  
Oscilla- Timer Clock  
SCA1–SCA0  
(pre-scale  
select)*  
T1M*  
Timer 1  
Reload  
Value (hex)  
tor Divide  
Factor  
Source  
230400  
115200  
57600  
–0.32%  
–0.32%  
0.15%  
106  
212  
SYSCLK  
SYSCLK  
XX  
XX  
XX  
01  
00  
00  
10  
10  
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0xCB  
0x96  
0x2B  
0x96  
0xB9  
0x96  
0x96  
0x2B  
426  
SYSCLK  
28800  
–0.32%  
0.15%  
848  
SYSCLK/4  
SYSCLK/12  
SYSCLK/12  
SYSCLK/48  
SYSCLK/48  
14400  
1704  
2544  
10176  
20448  
9600  
–0.32%  
–0.32%  
0.15%  
2400  
1200  
X = Don’t care  
*Note: SCA1SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 16.1.  
130  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
16. Timers  
Each MCU includes 3 counter/timers: two are 16-bit counter/timers compatible with those found in the  
standard 8051, and one is a 16-bit auto-reload timer for use with the ADC, SMBus, or for general purpose  
use. These timers can be used to measure time intervals, count external events and generate periodic  
interrupt requests. Timer 0 and Timer 1 are nearly identical and have four primary modes of operation.  
Timer 2 offers 16-bit and split 8-bit timer functionality with auto-reload.  
Timer 0 and Timer 1 Modes:  
13-bit counter/timer  
Timer 2 Modes:  
16-bit timer with auto-reload  
16-bit counter/timer  
8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload  
Two 8-bit counter/timers (Timer 0 only)  
Two 8-bit timers with auto-reload  
Timers 0 and 1 may be clocked by one of five sources, determined by the Timer Mode Select bits (T1M–  
T0M) and the Clock Scale bits (SCA1–SCA0). The Clock Scale bits define a pre-scaled clock from which  
Timer 0 and/or Timer 1 may be clocked (See SFR Definition 16.3 for pre-scaled clock selection).  
Timer 0/1 may then be configured to use this pre-scaled clock signal or the system clock. Timer 2 may be  
clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided  
by 8.  
Timer 0 and Timer 1 may also be operated as counters. When functioning as a counter, a counter/timer  
register is incremented on each high-to-low transition at the selected input pin. Events with a frequency of  
up to one-fourth the system clock's frequency can be counted. The input signal need not be periodic, but it  
should be held at a given level for at least two full system clock cycles to ensure the level is properly sam-  
pled.  
16.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1  
Each timer is implemented as 16-bit register accessed as two separate bytes: a low byte (TL0 or TL1) and  
a high byte (TH0 or TH1). The Counter/Timer Control register (TCON) is used to enable Timer 0 and Timer  
1 as well as indicate their status. Timer 0 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET0 bit in the IE register  
(Section “9.3.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions” on page 73); Timer 1 interrupts can be enabled by  
setting the ET1 bit in the IE register (Section 9.3.5). Both counter/timers operate in one of four primary  
modes selected by setting the Mode Select bits T1M1–T0M0 in the Counter/Timer Mode register (TMOD).  
Each timer can be configured independently. Each operating mode is described below.  
16.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer  
Timer 0 and Timer 1 operate as 13-bit counter/timers in Mode 0. The following describes the configuration  
and operation of Timer 0. However, both timers operate identically, and Timer 1 is configured in the same  
manner as described for Timer 0.  
The TH0 register holds the eight MSBs of the 13-bit counter/timer. TL0 holds the five LSBs in bit positions  
TL0.4–TL0.0. The three upper bits of TL0 (TL0.7–TL0.5) are indeterminate and should be masked out or  
ignored when reading. As the 13-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0x1FFF (all ones) to  
0x0000, the timer overflow flag TF0 (TCON.5) is set and an interrupt will occur if Timer 0 interrupts are  
enabled.  
The C/T0 bit (TMOD.2) selects the counter/timer's clock source. When C/T0 is set to logic 1, high-to-low  
transitions at the selected Timer 0 input pin (T0) increment the timer register. (See Section “13.1. Priority  
Rev. 0.5  
131  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
Crossbar Decoder” on page 98 for information on selecting and configuring external I/O pins.) Clearing  
C/T selects the clock defined by the T0M bit (CKCON.3). When T0M is set, Timer 0 is clocked by the sys-  
tem clock. When T0M is cleared, Timer 0 is clocked by the source selected by the Clock Scale bits in  
CKCON (see SFR Definition 16.3).  
Setting the TR0 bit (TCON.4) enables the timer when either GATE0 (TMOD.3) is logic 0 or the input signal  
/INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF (see SFR Definition 9.11). Setting GATE0 to ‘1’  
allows the timer to be controlled by the external input signal /INT0 (see Section “9.3.5. Interrupt Register  
Descriptions” on page 73), facilitating pulse width measurements.  
TR0  
0
1
1
1
GATE0  
/INT0  
Counter/Timer  
Disabled  
X
0
1
1
X
X
0
1
Enabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
X = Don't Care  
Setting TR0 does not force the timer to reset. The timer registers should be loaded with the desired initial  
value before the timer is enabled.  
TL1 and TH1 form the 13-bit register for Timer 1 in the same manner as described above for TL0 and TH0.  
Timer 1 is configured and controlled using the relevant TCON and TMOD bits just as with Timer 0. The  
input signal /INT1 is used with Timer 1; the /INT1 polarity is defined by bit IN1PL in register IT01CF (see  
SFR Definition 9.11).  
CKCON  
TMOD  
IT01CF  
G C T T G C T T  
I I I I I I I I  
T T T T S S  
2 2 1 0 C C  
MMMM A A  
A / 1 1 A  
/
0 0  
N N N N N N N N  
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0  
P S S S P S S S  
L L L L L L L L  
T T M M T T M M  
E 1 1 0 E 0 1 0  
H L  
1 0  
1
0
2 1 0  
2 1 0  
Pre-scaled Clock  
SYSCLK  
0
1
0
1
TF1  
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
IT1  
T0  
Interrupt  
TCLK  
TL0  
(5 bits)  
TH0  
(8 bits)  
TR0  
GATE0  
IE0  
IT0  
Crossbar  
IN0PL  
XOR  
/INT0  
Figure 16.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram  
132  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
16.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer  
Mode 1 operation is the same as Mode 0, except that the counter/timer registers use all 16 bits. The  
counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 1 in the same manner as for Mode 0.  
16.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload  
Mode 2 configures Timer 0 and Timer 1 to operate as 8-bit counter/timers with automatic reload of the start  
value. TL0 holds the count and TH0 holds the reload value. When the counter in TL0 overflows from all  
ones to 0x00, the timer overflow flag TF0 (TCON.5) is set and the counter in TL0 is reloaded from TH0. If  
Timer 0 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will occur when the TF0 flag is set. The reload value in TH0 is  
not changed. TL0 must be initialized to the desired value before enabling the timer for the first count to be  
correct. When in Mode 2, Timer 1 operates identically to Timer 0.  
Both counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 2 in the same manner as Mode 0. Setting the  
TR0 bit (TCON.4) enables the timer when either GATE0 (TMOD.3) is logic 0 or when the input signal /INT0  
is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF (see Section “9.3.2. External Interrupts” on page 71  
for details on the external input signals /INT0 and /INT1).  
CKCON  
TMOD  
IT01CF  
G C T T G C T T  
I I I I I I I I  
T T T T S S  
2 2 1 0 C C  
MMMM A A  
A / 1 1 A / 0 0 N N N N N N N N  
T T M M T T M M 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0  
E 1 1 0 E 0 1 0 P S S S P S S S  
H L  
1 0  
1
0
L L L L L L L L  
2 1 0  
2 1 0  
Pre-scaled Clock  
SYSCLK  
0
1
0
1
T0  
TF1  
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
TCLK  
TL0  
(8 bits)  
Interrupt  
TR0  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
Crossbar  
GATE0  
TH0  
Reload  
(8 bits)  
IN0PL  
XOR  
/INT0  
Figure 16.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
133  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
16.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)  
In Mode 3, Timer 0 is configured as two separate 8-bit counter/timers held in TL0 and TH0. The  
counter/timer in TL0 is controlled using the Timer 0 control/status bits in TCON and TMOD: TR0, C/T0,  
GATE0 and TF0. TL0 can use either the system clock or an external input signal as its timebase. The TH0  
register is restricted to a timer function sourced by the system clock or prescaled clock. TH0 is enabled  
using the Timer 1 run control bit TR1. TH0 sets the Timer 1 overflow flag TF1 on overflow and thus controls  
the Timer 1 interrupt.  
Timer 1 is inactive in Mode 3. When Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be operated in Modes 0,  
1 or 2, but cannot be clocked by external signals nor set the TF1 flag and generate an interrupt. However,  
the Timer 1 overflow can be used to generate baud rates for the SMBus and/or UART, and/or initiate ADC  
conversions. While Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 run control is handled through its mode set-  
tings. To run Timer 1 while Timer 0 is in Mode 3, set the Timer 1 Mode as 0, 1, or 2. To disable Timer 1,  
configure it for Mode 3.  
CKCON  
TMOD  
G C T T G C T T  
T T T T S S  
2 2 1 0 C C  
M M MM A A  
A
/ 1 1 A / 0 0  
T T M M T T M M  
E 1 1 0 E 0 1 0  
H L  
1 0  
1
0
Pre-scaled Clock  
SYSCLK  
0
1
TH0  
(8 bits)  
TR1  
TF1  
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
IT1  
Interrupt  
Interrupt  
0
IE0  
IT0  
1
T0  
TL0  
(8 bits)  
TR0  
Crossbar  
GATE0  
IN0PL  
XOR  
/INT0  
Figure 16.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram  
134  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 16.1. TCON: Timer Control  
R/W  
TF1  
Bit7  
R/W  
TR1  
Bit6  
R/W  
TF0  
Bit5  
R/W  
TR0  
Bit4  
R/W  
IE1  
Bit3  
R/W  
IT1  
Bit2  
R/W  
IE0  
Bit1  
R/W  
IT0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x88  
Bit0  
(bit addressable)  
Bit7:  
TF1: Timer 1 Overflow Flag.  
Set by hardware when Timer 1 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is auto-  
matically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 1 interrupt service routine.  
0: No Timer 1 overflow detected.  
1: Timer 1 has overflowed.  
Bit6:  
Bit5:  
TR1: Timer 1 Run Control.  
0: Timer 1 disabled.  
1: Timer 1 enabled.  
TF0: Timer 0 Overflow Flag.  
Set by hardware when Timer 0 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is auto-  
matically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 0 interrupt service routine.  
0: No Timer 0 overflow detected.  
1: Timer 0 has overflowed.  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
TR0: Timer 0 Run Control.  
0: Timer 0 disabled.  
1: Timer 0 enabled.  
IE1: External Interrupt 1.  
This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT1 is detected. It can be  
cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Inter-  
rupt 1 service routine if IT1 = 1. When IT1 = 0, this flag is set to ‘1’ when /INT1 is active as  
defined by bit IN1PL in register IT01CF (see SFR Definition 9.11).  
IT1: Interrupt 1 Type Select.  
Bit2:  
This bit selects whether the configured /INT1 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. /INT1  
is configured active low or high by the IN1PL bit in the IT01CF register (see SFR Definition  
9.11).  
0: /INT1 is level triggered.  
1: /INT1 is edge triggered.  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
IE0: External Interrupt 0.  
This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT0 is detected. It can be  
cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Inter-  
rupt 0 service routine if IT0 = 1. When IT0 = 0, this flag is set to ‘1’ when /INT0 is active as  
defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF (see SFR Definition 9.11).  
IT0: Interrupt 0 Type Select.  
This bit selects whether the configured /INT0 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. /INT0  
is configured active low or high by the IN0PL bit in register IT01CF (see SFR Definition  
9.11).  
0: /INT0 is level triggered.  
1: /INT0 is edge triggered.  
Rev. 0.5  
135  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 16.2. TMOD: Timer Mode  
R/W  
GATE1  
Bit7  
R/W  
C/T1  
Bit6  
R/W  
T1M1  
Bit5  
R/W  
T1M0  
Bit4  
R/W  
GATE0  
Bit3  
R/W  
C/T0  
Bit2  
R/W  
T0M1  
Bit1  
R/W  
T0M0  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x89  
Bit7:  
GATE1: Timer 1 Gate Control.  
0: Timer 1 enabled when TR1 = 1 irrespective of /INT1 logic level.  
1: Timer 1 enabled only when TR1 = 1 AND /INT1 is active as defined by bit IN1PL in regis-  
ter IT01CF (see SFR Definition 9.11).  
Bit6:  
C/T1: Counter/Timer 1 Select.  
0: Timer Function: Timer 1 incremented by clock defined by T1M bit (CKCON.4).  
1: Counter Function: Timer 1 incremented by high-to-low transitions on external pin (T1).  
Bits5–4: T1M1–T1M0: Timer 1 Mode Select.  
These bits select the Timer 1 operation mode.  
T1M1  
T1M0  
Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Mode 0: 13-bit counter/timer  
Mode 1: 16-bit counter/timer  
Mode 2: 8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload  
Mode 3: Timer 1 inactive  
Bit3:  
Bit2:  
GATE0: Timer 0 Gate Control.  
0: Timer 0 enabled when TR0 = 1 irrespective of /INT0 logic level.  
1: Timer 0 enabled only when TR0 = 1 AND /INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in regis-  
ter IT01CF (see SFR Definition 9.11).  
C/T0: Counter/Timer Select.  
0: Timer Function: Timer 0 incremented by clock defined by T0M bit (CKCON.3).  
1: Counter Function: Timer 0 incremented by high-to-low transitions on external pin (T0).  
Bits1–0: T0M1–T0M0: Timer 0 Mode Select.  
These bits select the Timer 0 operation mode.  
T0M1  
T0M0  
Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Mode 0: 13-bit counter/timer  
Mode 1: 16-bit counter/timer  
Mode 2: 8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload  
Mode 3: Two 8-bit counter/timers  
136  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 16.3. CKCON: Clock Control  
R/W  
-
R/W  
T2MH  
Bit6  
R/W  
T2ML  
Bit5  
R/W  
T1M  
Bit4  
R/W  
T0M  
Bit3  
R/W  
-
R/W  
SCA1  
Bit1  
R/W  
SCA0  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x8E  
Bit7  
Bit2  
Bit7:  
Bit6:  
UNUSED. Read = 0b, Write = don’t care.  
T2MH: Timer 2 High Byte Clock Select  
This bit selects the clock supplied to the Timer 2 high byte if Timer 2 is configured in split 8-  
bit timer mode. T2MH is ignored if Timer 2 is in any other mode.  
0: Timer 2 high byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN.  
1: Timer 2 high byte uses the system clock.  
Bit5:  
T2ML: Timer 2 Low Byte Clock Select  
This bit selects the clock supplied to Timer 2. If Timer 2 is configured in split 8-bit timer  
mode, this bit selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer.  
0: Timer 2 low byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN.  
1: Timer 2 low byte uses the system clock.  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
T1M: Timer 1 Clock Select.  
This select the clock source supplied to Timer 1. T1M is ignored when C/T1 is set to logic 1.  
0: Timer 1 uses the clock defined by the prescale bits, SCA1–SCA0.  
1: Timer 1 uses the system clock.  
T0M: Timer 0 Clock Select.  
This bit selects the clock source supplied to Timer 0. T0M is ignored when C/T0 is set to  
logic 1.  
0: Counter/Timer 0 uses the clock defined by the prescale bits, SCA1–SCA0.  
1: Counter/Timer 0 uses the system clock.  
Bit2:  
UNUSED. Read = 0b, Write = don’t care.  
Bits1–0: SCA1–SCA0: Timer 0/1 Prescale Bits  
These bits control the division of the clock supplied to Timer 0 and/or Timer 1 if configured  
to use prescaled clock inputs.  
SCA1  
SCA0  
Prescaled Clock  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
System clock divided by 12  
System clock divided by 4  
System clock divided by 48  
External clock divided by 8  
Note: External clock divided by 8 is synchronized with the system  
clock, and the external clock must be less than or equal to  
the system clock to operate in this mode.  
Rev. 0.5  
137  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 16.4. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x8A  
Bits 7–0: TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte.  
The TL0 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 0  
SFR Definition 16.5. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x8B  
Bits 7–0: TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte.  
The TL1 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.  
SFR Definition 16.6. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x8C  
Bits 7–0: TH0: Timer 0 High Byte.  
The TH0 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 0.  
SFR Definition 16.7. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0x8D  
Bits 7–0: TH1: Timer 1 High Byte.  
The TH1 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.  
138  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
16.2. Timer 2  
Timer 2 is a 16-bit timer formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMR2L (low byte) and TMR2H (high byte). Timer 2 may  
operate in 16-bit auto-reload mode or (split) 8-bit auto-reload mode. The T2SPLIT bit (TMR2CN.3) defines  
the Timer 2 operation mode.  
Timer 2 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator  
source divided by 8. The external clock mode is ideal for real-time clock (RTC) functionality, where the  
internal oscillator drives the system clock while Timer 2 (and/or the PCA) is clocked by an external preci-  
sion oscillator. Note that the external oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock.  
16.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload  
When T2SPLIT (TMR2CN.3) is zero, Timer 2 operates as a 16-bit timer with auto-reload. Timer 2 can be  
clocked by SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. As the  
16-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the 16-bit value in the Timer 2  
reload registers (TMR2RLH and TMR2RLL) is loaded into the Timer 2 register as shown in Figure 16.4,  
and the Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Flag (TMR2CN.7) is set. If Timer 2 interrupts are enabled (if IE.5 is  
set), an interrupt will be generated on each Timer 2 overflow. Additionally, if Timer 2 interrupts are enabled  
and the TF2LEN bit is set (TMR2CN.5), an interrupt will be generated each time the lower 8 bits (TMR2L)  
overflow from 0xFF to 0x00.  
CKCON  
T T T T S S  
2 2 1 0 C C  
T2XCLK  
MM M M A A  
H L  
1 0  
To ADC,  
SMBus  
To SMBus  
TMR2H  
SYSCLK / 12  
0
1
TMR2L  
Overflow  
0
1
TCLK  
TR2  
TF2H  
TMR2L  
Interrupt  
External Clock / 8  
SYSCLK  
TF2L  
TF2LEN  
T2SPLIT  
TR2  
T2XCLK  
TMR2RLL TMR2RLH  
Reload  
Figure 16.4. Timer 2 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
139  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
16.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload  
When T2SPLIT is set, Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit timers (TMR2H and TMR2L). Both 8-bit timers oper-  
ate in auto-reload mode as shown in Figure 16.5. TMR2RLL holds the reload value for TMR2L; TMR2RLH  
holds the reload value for TMR2H. The TR2 bit in TMR2CN handles the run control for TMR2H. TMR2L is  
always running when configured for 8-bit Mode.  
Each 8-bit timer may be configured to use SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock  
source divided by 8. The Timer 2 Clock Select bits (T2MH and T2ML in CKCON) select either SYSCLK or  
the clock defined by the Timer 2 External Clock Select bit (T2XCLK in TMR2CN), as follows:  
T2MH  
T2XCLK  
TMR2H Clock  
Source  
T2ML  
T2XCLK  
TMR2L Clock  
Source  
0
0
1
0
1
X
SYSCLK / 12  
External Clock / 8  
SYSCLK  
0
0
1
0
1
X
SYSCLK / 12  
External Clock / 8  
SYSCLK  
Note: External clock divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock, and the external clock must be  
less than or equal to the system clock to operate in this mode.  
The TF2H bit is set when TMR2H overflows from 0xFF to 0x00; the TF2L bit is set when TMR2L overflows  
from 0xFF to 0x00. When Timer 2 interrupts are enabled (IE.5), an interrupt is generated each time  
TMR2H overflows. If Timer 2 interrupts are enabled and TF2LEN (TMR2CN.5) is set, an interrupt is gener-  
ated each time either TMR2L or TMR2H overflows. When TF2LEN is enabled, software must check the  
TF2H and TF2L flags to determine the source of the Timer 2 interrupt. The TF2H and TF2L interrupt flags  
are not cleared by hardware and must be manually cleared by software.  
CKCON  
T T T T S S  
2 2 1 0 C C  
T2XCLK  
M M M M A A  
Reload  
TMR2RLH  
To SMBus  
H L  
1 0  
SYSCLK / 12  
0
1
0
1
External Clock / 8  
TCLK  
TF2H  
TF2L  
TF2LEN  
TMR2H  
Interrupt  
TR2  
T2SPLIT  
TR2  
Reload  
TMR2RLL  
T2XCLK  
SYSCLK  
1
0
To ADC,  
SMBus  
TCLK  
TMR2L  
Figure 16.5. Timer 2 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram  
140  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 16.8. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control  
R/W  
TF2H  
Bit7  
R/W  
TF2L  
Bit6  
R/W  
TF2LEN  
Bit5  
R/W  
-
R/W  
T2SPLIT  
Bit3  
R/W  
TR2  
Bit2  
R/W  
-
R/W  
Reset Value  
T2XCLK 00000000  
Bit4  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SFR Address:  
(bit addressable)  
0xC8  
Bit7:  
TF2H: Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Flag  
Set by hardware when the Timer 2 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16 bit mode,  
this will occur when Timer 2 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 2 interrupt is  
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 2 interrupt service routine.  
TF2H is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.  
TF2L: Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow Flag  
Set by hardware when the Timer 2 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. When this bit is  
set, an interrupt will be generated if TF2LEN is set and Timer 2 interrupts are enabled. TF2L  
will set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 2 mode. This bit is not automat-  
ically cleared by hardware.  
Bit6:  
Bit5:  
TF2LEN: Timer 2 Low Byte Interrupt Enable.  
This bit enables/disables Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts. If TF2LEN is set and Timer 2 inter-  
rupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 2 overflows.  
This bit should be cleared when operating Timer 2 in 16-bit mode.  
0: Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts disabled.  
1: Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts enabled.  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
UNUSED. Read = 0b. Write = don’t care.  
T2SPLIT: Timer 2 Split Mode Enable  
When this bit is set, Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload.  
0: Timer 2 operates in 16-bit auto-reload mode.  
1: Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit auto-reload timers.  
Bit2:  
TR2: Timer 2 Run Control.  
This bit enables/disables Timer 2. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR2H only;  
TMR2L is always enabled in this mode.  
0: Timer 2 disabled.  
1: Timer 2 enabled.  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
UNUSED. Read = 0b. Write = don’t care.  
T2XCLK: Timer 2 External Clock Select  
This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 2. If Timer 2 is in 8-bit mode, this bit  
selects the external oscillator clock source for both timer bytes. However, the Timer 2 Clock  
Select bits (T2MH and T2ML in register CKCON) may still be used to select between the  
external clock and the system clock for either timer.  
0: Timer 2 external clock selection is the system clock divided by 12.  
1: Timer 2 external clock selection is the external clock divided by 8. Note that the external  
oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock.  
Rev. 0.5  
141  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 16.9. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xCA  
Bits 7–0: TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte.  
TMR2RLL holds the low byte of the reload value for Timer 2.  
SFR Definition 16.10. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xCB  
Bits 7–0: TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte.  
The TMR2RLH holds the high byte of the reload value for Timer 2.  
SFR Definition 16.11. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xCC  
Bits 7–0: TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte.  
In 16-bit mode, the TMR2L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8-bit mode,  
TMR2L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value.  
SFR Definition 16.12. TMR2H Timer 2 High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xCD  
Bits 7–0: TMR2H: Timer 2 High Byte.  
In 16-bit mode, the TMR2H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8-bit  
mode, TMR2H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value.  
142  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17. Programmable Counter Array  
The Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) provides enhanced timer functionality while requiring less CPU  
intervention than the standard 8051 counter/timers. The PCA consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer  
and three 16-bit capture/compare modules. Each capture/compare module has its own associated I/O line  
(CEXn) which is routed through the Crossbar to Port I/O when enabled (See Section “13.1. Priority  
Crossbar Decoder” on page 98 for details on configuring the Crossbar). The counter/timer is driven by a  
programmable timebase that can select between six sources: system clock, system clock divided by four,  
system clock divided by twelve, the external oscillator clock source divided by 8, Timer 0 overflow, or an  
external clock signal on the ECI input pin. Each capture/compare module may be configured to operate  
independently in one of six modes: Edge-Triggered Capture, Software Timer, High-Speed Output, Fre-  
quency Output, 8-Bit PWM, or 16-Bit PWM (each mode is described in Section “17.2. Capture/Compare  
Modules” on page 145). The external oscillator clock option is ideal for real-time clock (RTC) functionality,  
allowing the PCA to be clocked by a precision external oscillator while the internal oscillator drives the sys-  
tem clock. The PCA is configured and controlled through the system controller's Special Function Regis-  
ters. The basic PCA block diagram is shown in Figure 17.1.  
Important Note: The PCA Module 2 may be used as a watchdog timer (WDT), and is enabled in this mode  
following a system reset. Access to certain PCA registers is restricted while WDT mode is enabled. See  
Section 17.3 for details.  
SYSCLK/12  
SYSCLK/4  
Timer 0 Overflow  
PCA  
16-Bit Counter/Timer  
CLOCK  
MUX  
ECI  
SYSCLK  
External Clock/8  
Capture/Compare  
Module 0  
Capture/Compare  
Module 1  
Capture/Compare  
Module 2 / WDT  
Digital Crossbar  
Port I/O  
Figure 17.1. PCA Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
143  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.1. PCA Counter/Timer  
The 16-bit PCA counter/timer consists of two 8-bit SFRs: PCA0L and PCA0H. PCA0H is the high byte  
(MSB) of the 16-bit counter/timer and PCA0L is the low byte (LSB). Reading PCA0L automatically latches  
the value of PCA0H into a “snapshot” register; the following PCA0H read accesses this “snapshot” register.  
Reading the PCA0L Register first guarantees an accurate reading of the entire 16-bit PCA0 counter.  
Reading PCA0H or PCA0L does not disturb the counter operation. The CPS2–CPS0 bits in the PCA0MD  
register select the timebase for the counter/timer as shown in Table 17.1. Note that in ‘External oscillator  
source divided by 8’ mode, the external oscillator source is synchronized with the system clock,  
and must have a frequency less than or equal to the system clock.  
When the counter/timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the Counter Overflow Flag (CF) in PCA0MD is  
set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CF interrupts are enabled. Setting the ECF bit in  
PCA0MD to logic 1 enables the CF flag to generate an interrupt request. The CF bit is not automatically  
cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by soft-  
ware (Note: PCA0 interrupts must be globally enabled before CF interrupts are recognized. PCA0 inter-  
rupts are globally enabled by setting the EA bit and the EPCA0 bit to logic 1). Clearing the CIDL bit in the  
PCA0MD register allows the PCA to continue normal operation while the CPU is in Idle mode.  
Table 17.1. PCA Timebase Input Options  
CPS2  
CPS1  
CPS0  
Timebase  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
System clock divided by 12  
System clock divided by 4  
Timer 0 overflow  
High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided by 4)  
System clock  
External oscillator source divided by 8*  
*Note: External oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock.  
IDLE  
PCA0MD  
PCA0CN  
C
I
D
L
W W C C C E  
D D P P P C  
T L S S S F  
E C 2 1 0  
K
C C  
F R  
C C C  
C C C  
F F F  
2 1 0  
To SFR Bus  
PCA0L  
read  
Snapshot  
Register  
SYSCLK/12  
SYSCLK/4  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
Timer 0 Overflow  
ECI  
0
Overflow  
To PCA Interrupt System  
PCA0H  
PCA0L  
1
SYSCLK  
CF  
External Clock/8  
To PCA Modules  
Figure 17.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram  
144  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.2. Capture/Compare Modules  
Each module can be configured to operate independently in one of six operation modes: Edge-triggered  
Capture, Software Timer, High Speed Output, Frequency Output, 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator, or 16-Bit  
Pulse Width Modulator. Each module has Special Function Registers (SFRs) associated with it in the CIP-  
51 system controller. These registers are used to exchange data with a module and configure the module's  
mode of operation.  
Table 17.2 summarizes the bit settings in the PCA0CPMn registers used to select the PCA capture/com-  
pare module’s operating modes. Setting the ECCFn bit in a PCA0CPMn register enables the module's  
CCFn interrupt. Note: PCA0 interrupts must be globally enabled before individual CCFn interrupts are rec-  
ognized. PCA0 interrupts are globally enabled by setting the EA bit and the EPCA0 bit to logic 1. See  
Figure 17.3 for details on the PCA interrupt configuration.  
Table 17.2. PCA0CPM Register Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules  
PWM16 ECOM CAPP CAPN MAT TOG PWM ECCF  
Operation Mode  
Capture triggered by positive edge  
on CEXn  
Capture triggered by negative  
edge on CEXn  
Capture triggered by transition on  
CEXn  
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
X
X
X
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
X
Software Timer  
High Speed Output  
Frequency Output  
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator  
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator  
1
X = Don’t Care  
(for n = 0 to 2)  
PCA0CPMn  
PCA0CN  
PCA0MD  
P
W
M
1
E C C M T  
C A A A O  
O P P T G  
M P N n n  
n n n  
P
W
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
C C  
F R  
C C C  
C C C  
F F F  
2 1 0  
C WW C C C E  
I D D P P P C  
D T L S S S F  
L E C 2 1 0  
K
6
n
0
PCA Counter/  
Timer Overflow  
1
EPCA0  
EA  
ECCF0  
0
1
Interrupt  
Priority  
Decoder  
PCA Module 0  
(CCF0)  
0
1
0
1
ECCF1  
ECCF2  
0
1
PCA Module 1  
(CCF1)  
0
1
PCA Module 2  
(CCF2)  
Figure 17.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
145  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.2.1. Edge-triggered Capture Mode  
In this mode, a valid transition on the CEXn pin causes the PCA to capture the value of the PCA counter/  
timer and copy it into the corresponding module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPLn and  
PCA0CPHn). The CAPPn and CAPNn bits in the PCA0CPMn register are used to select the type of transi-  
tion that triggers the capture: low-to-high transition (positive edge), high-to-low transition (negative edge),  
or either transition (positive or negative edge). When a capture occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn)  
in PCA0CN is set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CCF interrupts are enabled. The CCFn  
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and  
must be cleared by software. If both CAPPn and CAPNn bits are set to logic 1, then the state of the Port  
pin associated with CEXn can be read directly to determine whether a rising-edge or falling-edge caused  
the capture.  
PCA Interrupt  
PCA0CPMn  
PCA0CN  
P
W
M
1
E C C M T  
C A A A O  
O P P T G  
M P N n n  
n n n  
P
W
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
C C  
F R  
C C C  
C C C  
F F F  
2 1 0  
6
n
x 0  
0 0 0  
x
PCA0CPLn  
PCA0CPHn  
0
1
CEXn  
Capture  
Port I/O  
Crossbar  
0
1
PCA  
Timebase  
PCA0L  
PCA0H  
Figure 17.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram  
Note: The CEXn input signal must remain high or low for at least 2 system clock cycles to be recognized by the  
hardware.  
146  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.2.2. Software Timer (Compare) Mode  
In Software Timer mode, the PCA counter/timer value is compared to the module's 16-bit capture/compare  
register (PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in  
PCA0CN is set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CCF interrupts are enabled. The CCFn bit  
is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must  
be cleared by software. Setting the ECOMn and MATn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables Software  
Timer mode.  
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/  
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit  
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.  
Write to  
0
PCA0CPLn  
ENB  
Reset  
Write to  
PCA0CPHn  
ENB  
PCA Interrupt  
1
PCA0CPMn  
P
W
M
1
6
n
E C C M T  
C A A A O  
O P P T G  
M P N n n  
n n n  
P
W
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
PCA0CN  
C C C C C  
F R  
C C C  
F F F  
2 1 0  
PCA0CPLn  
PCA0CPHn  
x
0 0  
0 0  
x
0
1
Enable  
Match  
16-bit Comparator  
PCA  
Timebase  
PCA0L  
PCA0H  
Figure 17.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram  
Rev. 0.5  
147  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.2.3. High Speed Output Mode  
In High Speed Output mode, a module’s associated CEXn pin is toggled each time a match occurs  
between the PCA Counter and the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and  
PCA0CPLn) Setting the TOGn, MATn, and ECOMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables the High-  
Speed Output mode.  
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/  
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit  
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.  
Write to  
0
PCA0CPLn  
ENB  
Reset  
PCA0CPMn  
Write to  
PCA0CPHn  
P
W
M
1
E C C M T  
C A A A O  
O P P T G  
M P N n n  
n n n  
P
W
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
ENB  
1
6
n
x
0 0  
0 x  
PCA Interrupt  
PCA0CN  
C C C C C  
F R  
C C C  
F F F  
2 1 0  
PCA0CPLn  
PCA0CPHn  
0
1
Enable  
Match  
16-bit Comparator  
TOGn  
Toggle  
0
CEXn  
Crossbar  
Port I/O  
1
PCA  
Timebase  
PCA0L  
PCA0H  
Figure 17.6. PCA High Speed Output Mode Diagram  
148  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.2.4. Frequency Output Mode  
Frequency Output Mode produces a programmable-frequency square wave on the module’s associated  
CEXn pin. The capture/compare module high byte holds the number of PCA clocks to count before the out-  
put is toggled. The frequency of the square wave is then defined by Equation 17.1.  
FPCA  
----------------------------------------  
=
FCEXn  
2 × PCA0CPHn  
Equation 17.1. Square Wave Frequency Output  
Where FPCA is the frequency of the clock selected by the CPS2–0 bits in the PCA mode register,  
PCA0MD. The lower byte of the capture/compare module is compared to the PCA counter low byte; on a  
match, CEXn is toggled and the offset held in the high byte is added to the matched value in PCA0CPLn.  
Frequency Output Mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, TOGn, and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn reg-  
ister.  
Write to  
PCA0CPLn  
0
ENB  
Reset  
PCA0CPMn  
P
W
M
1
6
n
E C C M T  
C A A A O  
O P P T G  
M P N n n  
n n n  
P
W
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
Write to  
PCA0CPHn  
ENB  
PCA0CPLn  
8-bit Adder  
PCA0CPHn  
1
Adder  
Enable  
TOGn  
x
0
0
0
x
Toggle  
0
CEXn  
8-bit  
Comparator  
Enable  
match  
Crossbar  
Port I/O  
1
PCA Timebase  
PCA0L  
Figure 17.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode  
Rev. 0.5  
149  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.2.5. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode  
Each module can be used independently to generate a pulse width modulated (PWM) output on its associ-  
ated CEXn pin. The frequency of the output is dependent on the timebase for the PCA counter/timer. The  
duty cycle of the PWM output signal is varied using the module's PCA0CPLn capture/compare register.  
When the value in the low byte of the PCA counter/timer (PCA0L) is equal to the value in PCA0CPLn, the  
output on the CEXn pin will be set to ‘1’. When the count value in PCA0L overflows, the CEXn output will  
be set to ‘0’ (see Figure 17.8). Also, when the counter/timer low byte (PCA0L) overflows from 0xFF to  
0x00, PCA0CPLn is reloaded automatically with the value stored in the module’s capture/compare high  
byte (PCA0CPHn) without software intervention. Setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn  
register enables 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator mode. The duty cycle for 8-Bit PWM Mode is given by  
Equation 17.2.  
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/  
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit  
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.  
(256 – PCA0CPHn)  
---------------------------------------------------  
DutyCycle =  
256  
Equation 17.2. 8-Bit PWM Duty Cycle  
Using Equation 17.2, the largest duty cycle is 100% (PCA0CPHn = 0), and the smallest duty cycle is  
0.39% (PCA0CPHn = 0xFF). A 0% duty cycle may be generated by clearing the ECOMn bit to ‘0’.  
Write to  
0
PCA0CPLn  
PCA0CPHn  
PCA0CPLn  
ENB  
Reset  
Write to  
PCA0CPHn  
ENB  
1
PCA0CPMn  
P
W
M
1
E C C M T  
C A A A O  
O P P T G  
M P N n n  
n n n  
P
W
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
6
n
0
0
0
x
0
x
SET  
CLR  
8-bit  
Comparator  
Enable  
match  
CEXn  
S
R
Q
Q
Crossbar  
Port I/O  
PCA Timebase  
PCA0L  
Overflow  
Figure 17.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram  
150  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.2.6. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode  
A PCA module may also be operated in 16-Bit PWM mode. In this mode, the 16-bit capture/compare mod-  
ule defines the number of PCA clocks for the low time of the PWM signal. When the PCA counter matches  
the module contents, the output on CEXn is set to ‘1’; when the counter overflows, CEXn is set to ‘0’. To  
output a varying duty cycle, new value writes should be synchronized with PCA CCFn match interrupts.  
16-Bit PWM Mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, PWMn, and PWM16n bits in the PCA0CPMn register.  
For a varying duty cycle, match interrupts should be enabled (ECCFn = 1 AND MATn = 1) to help synchro-  
nize the capture/compare register writes. The duty cycle for 16-Bit PWM Mode is given by Equation 17.3.  
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/  
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit  
to ‘0’; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to ‘1’.  
(65536 – PCA0CPn)  
----------------------------------------------------  
DutyCycle =  
65536  
Equation 17.3. 16-Bit PWM Duty Cycle  
Using Equation 17.3, the largest duty cycle is 100% (PCA0CPn = 0), and the smallest duty cycle is  
0.0015% (PCA0CPn = 0xFFFF). A 0% duty cycle may be generated by clearing the ECOMn bit to ‘0’.  
Write to  
PCA0CPLn  
0
ENB  
Reset  
Write to  
PCA0CPHn  
ENB  
1
PCA0CPMn  
P
W
M
1
E C C M T  
C A A A O  
O P P T G  
M P N n n  
n n n  
P
W
M
n
E
C
C
F
n
PCA0CPHn  
PCA0CPLn  
6
n
1
0
0
x
0
x
SET  
CLR  
Enable  
match  
CEXn  
16-bit Comparator  
S
R
Q
Q
Crossbar  
Port I/O  
PCA Timebase  
PCA0H  
PCA0L  
Overflow  
Figure 17.9. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode  
17.3. Watchdog Timer Mode  
A programmable watchdog timer (WDT) function is available through the PCA Module 2. The WDT is used  
to generate a reset if the time between writes to the WDT update register (PCA0CPH2) exceed a specified  
limit. The WDT can be configured and enabled/disabled as needed by software.  
With the WDTE bit set in the PCA0MD register, Module 2 operates as a watchdog timer (WDT). The Mod-  
ule 2 high byte is compared to the PCA counter high byte; the Module 2 low byte holds the offset to be  
used when WDT updates are performed. The Watchdog Timer is enabled on reset. Writes to some  
PCA registers are restricted while the Watchdog Timer is enabled.  
Rev. 0.5  
151  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.3.1. Watchdog Timer Operation  
While the WDT is enabled:  
PCA counter is forced on.  
Writes to PCA0L and PCA0H are not allowed.  
PCA clock source bits (CPS2–CPS0) are frozen.  
PCA Idle control bit (CIDL) is frozen.  
Module 2 is forced into software timer mode.  
Writes to the module 2 mode register (PCA0CPM2) are disabled.  
While the WDT is enabled, writes to the CR bit will not change the PCA counter state; the counter will run  
until the WDT is disabled. The PCA counter run control (CR) will read zero if the WDT is enabled but user  
software has not enabled the PCA counter. If a match occurs between PCA0CPH2 and PCA0H while the  
WDT is enabled, a reset will be generated. To prevent a WDT reset, the WDT may be updated with a write  
of any value to PCA0CPH2. Upon a PCA0CPH2 write, PCA0H plus the offset held in PCA0CPL2 is loaded  
into PCA0CPH2 (See Figure 17.10).  
PCA0MD  
C
I
D
L
W W C C C E  
D D P P P C  
T L S S S F  
E C 2 1 0  
K
PCA0CPH2  
8-bit  
Comparator  
Match  
Reset  
Enable  
PCA0L Overflow  
PCA0CPL2  
8-bit Adder  
PCA0H  
Adder  
Enable  
Write to  
PCA0CPH2  
Figure 17.10. PCA Module 2 with Watchdog Timer Enabled  
Note that the 8-bit offset held in PCA0CPH2 is compared to the upper byte of the 16-bit PCA counter. This  
offset value is the number of PCA0L overflows before a reset. Up to 256 PCA clocks may pass before the  
first PCA0L overflow occurs, depending on the value of the PCA0L when the update is performed. The  
total offset is then given (in PCA clocks) by Equation 17.4, where PCA0L is the value of the PCA0L register  
at the time of the update.  
Offset = (256 × PCA0CPL2) + (256 – PCA0L)  
Equation 17.4. Watchdog Timer Offset in PCA Clocks  
The WDT reset is generated when PCA0L overflows while there is a match between PCA0CPH2 and  
PCA0H. Software may force a WDT reset by writing a ‘1’ to the CCF2 flag (PCA0CN.2) while the WDT is  
enabled.  
152  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.3.2. Watchdog Timer Usage  
To configure the WDT, perform the following tasks:  
Disable the WDT by writing a ‘0’ to the WDTE bit.  
Select the desired PCA clock source (with the CPS2–CPS0 bits).  
Load PCA0CPL2 with the desired WDT update offset value.  
Configure the PCA Idle mode (set CIDL if the WDT should be suspended while the CPU is in Idle  
mode).  
Enable the WDT by setting the WDTE bit to ‘1’.  
Reload the WDT by writing any value to PCA0CPH2.  
The PCA clock source and Idle mode select cannot be changed while the WDT is enabled. The Watchdog  
Timer is enabled by setting the WDTE or WDLCK bits in the PCA0MD register. When WDLCK is set, the  
WDT cannot be disabled until the next system reset. If WDLCK is not set, the WDT is disabled by clearing  
the WDTE bit.  
The WDT is enabled following any reset. The PCA0 counter clock defaults to the system clock divided by  
12, PCA0L defaults to 0x00, and PCA0CPL2 defaults to 0x00. Using Equation 17.4, this results in a WDT  
timeout interval of 3072 system clock cycles. Table 17.3 lists some example timeout intervals for typical  
system clocks, assuming SYSCLK / 12 as the PCA clock source.  
1
Table 17.3. Watchdog Timer Timeout Intervals  
System Clock (Hz)  
24,500,000  
24,500,000  
24,500,000  
12,250,000  
12,250,000  
12,250,000  
6,125,000  
PCA0CPL2  
255  
Timeout Interval (ms)  
32.1  
16.2  
4.1  
128  
32  
255  
64.2  
32.4  
8.3  
128  
32  
255  
128.4  
64.7  
16.6  
257  
6,125,000  
128  
6,125,000  
32  
3,062,5002  
3,062,5002  
3,062,5002  
255  
128  
32  
129.5  
33.1  
Notes:  
1. Assumes SYSCLK/12 as the PCA clock source, and a PCA0L value of 0x00 at the update time.  
2. Internal reset frequency for SYSCLK (Internal Oscillator/8).  
Rev. 0.5  
153  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
17.4. Register Descriptions for PCA  
Following are detailed descriptions of the special function registers related to the operation of the PCA.  
SFR Definition 17.1. PCA0CN: PCA Control  
R/W  
CF  
Bit7  
R/W  
CR  
Bit6  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
CCF2  
Bit2  
R/W  
CCF1  
Bit1  
R/W  
CCF0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xD8  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit0  
(bit addressable)  
Bit7:  
CF: PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Flag.  
Set by hardware when the PCA Counter/Timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the  
Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector  
to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and  
must be cleared by software.  
Bit6:  
CR: PCA Counter/Timer Run Control.  
This bit enables/disables the PCA Counter/Timer.  
0: PCA Counter/Timer disabled.  
1: PCA Counter/Timer enabled.  
Bits5–3: UNUSED. Read = 000b, Write = don't care.  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
CCF2: PCA Module 2 Capture/Compare Flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF2 interrupt is  
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This  
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.  
CCF1: PCA Module 1 Capture/Compare Flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF1 interrupt is  
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This  
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.  
CCF0: PCA Module 0 Capture/Compare Flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF0 interrupt is  
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This  
bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.  
154  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 17.2. PCA0MD: PCA Mode  
R/W  
CIDL  
Bit7  
R/W  
WDTE  
Bit6  
R/W  
WDLCK  
Bit5  
R/W  
R/W  
CPS2  
Bit3  
R/W  
CPS1  
Bit2  
R/W  
CPS0  
Bit1  
R/W  
ECF  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
01000000  
SFR Address:  
0xD9  
Bit4  
Bit7:  
CIDL: PCA Counter/Timer Idle Control.  
Specifies PCA behavior when CPU is in Idle Mode.  
0: PCA continues to function normally while the system controller is in Idle Mode.  
1: PCA operation is suspended while the system controller is in Idle Mode.  
WDTE: Watchdog Timer Enable  
If this bit is set, PCA Module 2 is used as the Watchdog Timer.  
0: Watchdog Timer disabled.  
Bit6:  
Bit5:  
1: PCA Module 2 enabled as Watchdog Timer.  
WDLCK: Watchdog Timer Lock  
This bit locks/unlocks the Watchdog Timer Enable. When WDLCK is set, the Watchdog  
Timer may not be disabled until the next system reset.  
0: Watchdog Timer Enable unlocked.  
1: Watchdog Timer Enable locked.  
Bit4:  
UNUSED. Read = 0b, Write = don't care.  
Bits3–1: CPS2–CPS0: PCA Counter/Timer Pulse Select.  
These bits select the clock source for the PCA counter  
CPS2  
CPS1  
CPS0  
Timebase  
System clock divided by 12  
System clock divided by 4  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Timer 0 overflow  
High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock  
divided by 4)  
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
System clock  
External clock divided by 8*  
Reserved  
Reserved  
*Note: External oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock.  
Bit0:  
ECF: PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.  
This bit sets the masking of the PCA Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt.  
0: Disable the CF interrupt.  
1: Enable a PCA Counter/Timer Overflow interrupt when CF (PCA0CN.7) is set.  
Note: When the WDTE bit is set to ‘1’, the PCA0MD register cannot be modified. To change the contents of the  
PCA0MD register, the Watchdog Timer must first be disabled.  
Rev. 0.5  
155  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 17.3. PCA0CPMn: PCA Capture/Compare Mode  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
CAPPn  
Bit5  
R/W  
CAPNn  
Bit4  
R/W  
MATn  
Bit3  
R/W  
TOGn  
Bit2  
R/W  
PWMn  
Bit1  
R/W  
Reset Value  
PWM16n ECOMn  
ECCFn 00000000  
Bit0  
Bit7  
Bit6  
SFR Address:  
0xDA, 0xDB,  
0xDC  
PCA0CPMn Address:  
PCA0CPM0 = 0xDA (n = 0)  
PCA0CPM1 = 0xDB (n = 1)  
PCA0CPM2 = 0xDC (n = 2)  
Bit7:  
Bit6:  
Bit5:  
Bit4:  
Bit3:  
PWM16n: 16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable.  
This bit selects 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled (PWMn = 1).  
0: 8-bit PWM selected.  
1: 16-bit PWM selected.  
ECOMn: Comparator Function Enable.  
This bit enables/disables the comparator function for PCA Module n.  
0: Disabled.  
1: Enabled.  
CAPPn: Capture Positive Function Enable.  
This bit enables/disables the positive edge capture for PCA Module n.  
0: Disabled.  
1: Enabled.  
CAPNn: Capture Negative Function Enable.  
This bit enables/disables the negative edge capture for PCA Module n.  
0: Disabled.  
1: Enabled.  
MATn: Match Function Enable.  
This bit enables/disables the match function for PCA Module n. When enabled, matches of the  
PCA counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the CCFn bit in PCA0MD regis-  
ter to be set to logic 1.  
0: Disabled.  
1: Enabled.  
Bit2:  
Bit1:  
Bit0:  
TOGn: Toggle Function Enable.  
This bit enables/disables the toggle function for PCA Module n. When enabled, matches of the  
PCA counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEXn pin  
to toggle. If the PWMn bit is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency Output  
Mode.  
0: Disabled.  
1: Enabled.  
PWMn: Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable.  
This bit enables/disables the PWM function for PCA Module n. When enabled, a pulse width  
modulated signal is output on the CEXn pin. 8-bit PWM is used if PWM16n is cleared; 16-bit  
mode is used if PWM16n is set to logic 1. If the TOGn bit is also set, the module operates in  
Frequency Output Mode.  
0: Disabled.  
1: Enabled.  
ECCFn: Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable.  
This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) interrupt.  
0: Disable CCFn interrupts.  
1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCFn is set.  
156  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 17.4. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xF9  
Bits 7–0: PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte.  
The PCA0L register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer.  
SFR Definition 17.5. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xFA  
Bits 7–0: PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte.  
The PCA0H register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer.  
Rev. 0.5  
157  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
SFR Definition 17.6. PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xFB, 0xE9,  
0xEB  
PCA0CPLn Address:  
PCA0CPL0 = 0xFB (n = 0)  
PCA0CPL1 = 0xE9 (n = 1)  
PCA0CPL2 = 0xEB (n = 2)  
Bits7–0: PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte.  
The PCA0CPLn register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture Module n.  
SFR Definition 17.7. PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte  
R/W  
Bit7  
R/W  
Bit6  
R/W  
Bit5  
R/W  
Bit4  
R/W  
Bit3  
R/W  
Bit2  
R/W  
Bit1  
R/W  
Bit0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
SFR Address:  
0xFC, 0xEA,  
0xEC  
PCA0CPHn Address:  
PCA0CPH0 = 0xFC (n = 0)  
PCA0CPH1 = 0xEA (n = 1)  
PCA0CPH2 = 0xEC(n = 2)  
Bits7–0: PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte.  
The PCA0CPHn register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture Module n.  
158  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
18. Revision Specific Behavior  
This chapter contains behavioral differences between C8051T60x "REV C" and behavior as stated in the  
data sheet.  
These deviations will be resolved in the next revision of the device.  
18.1. Revision Identification  
The Lot ID Code on the top side of the device package can be used for decoding device revision informa-  
tion. On C8051T60x devices the revision letter is the first letter of the Lot ID Code.  
Figure 18.1 and Figure 18.2 show how to find the Lot ID Code on the top side of the device package.  
C8051T600  
CNZWFA  
0648  
This first character identifies  
the Silicon Revision  
Figure 18.1. Device Package - SOIC 14  
T600  
CNZW  
648+  
This first character identifies  
the Silicon Revision  
Figure 18.2. Device Package - QFN 10  
Rev. 0.5  
159  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
18.2. SAR Clock Maximum  
The maximum SAR clock for "REV C" devices is slower than specified in the data sheet.  
On "REV C" devices, the maximum SAR clock for full-performance operation is 4 MHz. If the SAR clock is  
operated faster than 4 MHz on "REV C" devices, there will be degradation to SNR and linearity perfor-  
mance of the ADC.  
This issue will be corrected for "REV D" and later devices.  
18.3. V Monitor Oscillation  
DD  
On "REV C" devices, when the VDD Supply Monitor is enabled, the device may go into and come back out  
of reset very quickly when the supply is very close to the supply monitor's reset threshold. This will cause  
the /RST line on the device to pulse low and high accordingly, and may affect systems which are connect-  
ing /RST to other devices as well.  
This issue will be corrected for "REV D" and later devices.  
160  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
19. C2 Interface  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5 devices include an on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) debug interface to allow  
EPROM programming and in-system debugging with the production part installed in the end application.  
The C2 interface operates using only two pins: a bi-directional data signal (C2D), and a clock input  
(C2CK). See the C2 Interface Specification for details on the C2 protocol.  
19.1. C2 Interface Registers  
The following describes the C2 registers necessary to perform EPROM programming functions through the  
C2 interface. All C2 registers are accessed through the C2 interface as described in the C2 Interface Spec-  
ification.  
C2 Register Definition 19.1. C2ADD: C2 Address  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
The C2ADD register is accessed via the C2 interface to select the target Data register for  
C2 Data Read and Data Write commands, and to report status information. Address register  
writes select a register, while address register reads return status information.  
Bits7–0: Write: Select target Data Read or Data Write register location:  
Address  
0x00  
0x01  
Description  
Selects the Device ID Register (read only)  
Selects the Revision ID Register (read only)  
Selects the C2 Device Control Register  
Selects the C2 EPROM Programming Control Register  
Selects the C2 EPROM Data Register  
Selects the C2 EPROM Address High Byte Register  
Selects the C2 EPROM Address Low Byte Register  
Selects the CRC0 Register  
Selects the CRC1 Register  
Selects the CRC2 Register  
Selects the CRC3 Register  
Selects the Port0 SFR  
0x02  
0xDF  
0xBF  
0xAF  
0xAE  
0xA9  
0xAA  
0xAB  
0xAC  
0x80  
0xF1  
0xA4  
Selects the Port0 Input Mode SFR  
Selects the Port0 Output Mode SFR  
Bit7:  
Bit6:  
Read: OTPBusy. A ‘1’ indicates that the hardware is performing a write, read, or CRC oper-  
ation.  
Read: OTPError. A ‘1’ indicates that the most recent OTP operation failed.  
Bits5-0: Read: Don’t Care.  
Rev. 0.5  
161  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
C2 Register Definition 19.2. DEVICEID: C2 Device ID  
Reset Value  
00010000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0x00  
This read-only register returns the 8-bit device ID: 0x10.  
C2 Register Definition 19.3. REVID: C2 Revision ID  
Reset Value  
Variable  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0x01  
This read-only register returns the 8-bit revision ID: For example, Revision A = 0x00.  
C2 Register Definition 19.4. DEVCTL: C2 Device State  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0x02  
Bits7–0 DEVSTATE: Device Control Register  
This register is used to halt the device for EPROM operations via the C2 interface. Refer to  
the OTP chapter for more information.  
C2 Register Definition 19.5. EPCTL: C2 EPROM Programming Control  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0xDF  
Bits7–0 EPCTL: EPROM Programming Control Register  
This register is used to enable EPROM programming via the C2 interface. Refer to the OTP  
chapter for more information.  
162  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
C2 Register Definition 19.6. EPDAT: C2 EPROM Data  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0xBF  
Bits7–0: EPDAT: C2 EPROM Data Register  
This register is used to pass EPROM data during C2 EPROM operations.  
C2 Register Definition 19.7. EPADDRH: C2 EPROM Address High Byte  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0xAF  
Bits7–0: EPADDRH: C2 EPROM Address High Byte Register  
This register is used to set the EPROM address location during C2 EPROM operations.  
C2 Register Definition 19.8. EPADDRL: C2 EPROM Address Low Byte  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0xAE  
Bits7–0: EPADDRL: C2 EPROM Address Low Byte Register  
This register is used to set the EPROM address location during C2 EPROM operations.  
Rev. 0.5  
163  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
C2 Register Definition 19.9. CRC0: CRC Byte 0  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0xA9  
Bits7–0: CRC Byte 0.  
A write to this register initiates a 16-bit CRC of one 256-byte block of EPROM memory. The  
byte written to CRC0 is the upper byte of the 16-bit address where the CRC will begin. The  
lower byte of the beginning address is always 0x00. When complete, the 16-bit result will be  
available in CRC1 (MSB) and CRC0 (LSB). See Section “11.3. Program Memory CRC”  
on page 89.  
C2 Register Definition 19.10. CRC1: CRC Byte 1  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0xAB  
Bits7–0: CRC Byte 1.  
A write to this register initiates a 32-bit CRC on the entire program memory space. The CRC  
begins at address 0x0000. When complete, the 32-bit result is stored in CRC3 (MSB),  
CRC2, CRC1, and CRC0 (LSB). See Section “11.3. Program Memory CRC” on page 89.  
C2 Register Definition 19.11. CRC2: CRC Byte 2  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0xAC  
Bits7–0: CRC Byte 2. See Section “11.3. Program Memory CRC” on page 89.  
164  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
C2 Register Definition 19.12. CRC3: CRC Byte 3  
Reset Value  
00000000  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
C2ADD:  
0xAD  
Bits7–0: CRC Byte 3. See Section “11.3. Program Memory CRC” on page 89.  
Rev. 0.5  
165  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
19.2. C2 Pin Sharing  
The C2 protocol allows the C2 pins to be shared with user functions so that in-system debugging and  
EPROM programming functions may be performed. This is possible because C2 communication is typi-  
cally performed when the device is in the halt state, where all on-chip peripherals and user software are  
stalled. In this halted state, the C2 interface can safely ‘borrow’ the C2CK (normally RST) and C2D (nor-  
mally P0.7) pins. In most applications, external resistors are required to isolate C2 interface traffic from the  
user application when performing debug functions. These external resistors are not necessary for produc-  
tion boards. A typical isolation configuration is shown in Figure 19.1.  
/Reset (a)  
Input (b)  
C2CK (/RST)  
C2D (P0.7)  
Output (c)  
C2 Interface Master  
Figure 19.1. Typical C2 Pin Sharing  
The configuration in Figure 19.1 assumes the following:  
1. The user input (b) cannot change state while the target device is halted.  
2. The RST pin on the target device is used as an input only.  
Additional resistors may be necessary depending on the specific application.  
166  
Rev. 0.5  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
NOTES:  
Rev. 0.5  
167  
C8051T600/1/2/3/4/5  
CONTACT INFORMATION  
Silicon Laboratories Inc.  
400 West Cesar Chavez  
Austin, TX 78701  
Email: MCUinfo@silabs.com  
Internet: www.silabs.com  
The information in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects at the time of publication but is subject to change  
without notice. Silicon Laboratories assumes no responsibility for errors and omissions, and disclaims responsibility for any  
consequences resulting from the use of information included herein. Additionally, Silicon Laboratories assumes no responsi-  
bility for the functioning of undescribed features or parameters. Silicon Laboratories reserves the right to make changes with-  
out further notice. Silicon Laboratories makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products  
for any particular purpose, nor does Silicon Laboratories assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any prod-  
uct or circuit, and specifically disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages.  
Silicon Laboratories products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use in applications intended to support or sustain  
life, or for any other application in which the failure of the Silicon Laboratories product could create a situation where personal  
injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Silicon Laboratories products for any such unintended or unautho-  
rized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Silicon Laboratories harmless against all claims and damages.  
Silicon Laboratories and Silicon Labs are trademarks of Silicon Laboratories Inc.  
Other products or brandnames mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
168  
Rev. 0.5  

相关型号:

C8051T606

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T606-GM

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T606-GT

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T606-ZM

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T610

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T610-GQ

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T610_11

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T611

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T611-GM

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T612

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T612-GQ

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON

C8051T613

Mixed-Signal Byte-Programmable EPROM MCU
SILICON